JP6307644B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

When there are a plurality of count values, each count value is updated by a simple method. SOLUTION: A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed, and a count value capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle Update means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT)). The count value updating means stores the value specifying the predetermined address in the first register (HL register) (step S631) and stores the predetermined value (number of timers) in the second register (B register) (step S631). A) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S633), and b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S634). And c) the process of updating the value of the second register (step S635) is repeated until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”). [Selection] Figure 55

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that updates a count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when an effect is to be executed, a delay time lottery is performed, the delay time obtained by this lottery is measured with a subtraction timer, and after the delay time has elapsed, a signal is sent to the effect execution circuit. Is known, and a technique for starting production is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-052133 A

In the above-described conventional gaming machine, for example, when there are a plurality of measurement objects (when a plurality of timer values are updated), the program may become complicated and the program capacity may increase.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to update each count value with a simple program when there are a plurality of count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). In addition, the invention which concerns on the initial claim of this application is corresponded to the initial invention 1 among the initial inventions 1-8 mentioned later.
For example, the invention of claim 1 corresponding to the first embodiment
A first 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in FIG. 31, among seven of “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)”) , For example, “F021 (H)”) and a second 1-byte storage area (for example, “F022 (H)”),
Count value updating means (timer in FIG. 55) capable of updating at least the count value of the first 1-byte storage area and the count value of the second 1-byte storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms). equipped with a measurement (I_TIME_CNT)),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S631), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S632) memorize | stored in is performed,
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 1-byte storage area based on the value of the first register (step S633 in FIG. 55);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S634 in FIG. 55);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S635 in FIG. 55) is repeatedly executed until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”), so that at least the first 1 The count value of the byte storage area and the count value of the second 1-byte storage area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above a), when the count value stored in the 1-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Thus, the count value after the subtraction remains “0” .
The invention of claim 1 corresponding to the second embodiment C (example 2)
A first 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed (“F027 (H)” to “F02D (H in the second embodiment C of FIG. 61)) ) ", For example," F02D (H) ") and a second 1-byte storage area (for example," F02C (H) "),
Count value updating means (timer in FIG. 66) capable of updating at least the count value of the first 1-byte storage area and the count value of the second 1-byte storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms). equipped with a measurement (I_TIME_CNT)),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02D (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S851), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S852) memorize | stored in is performed,
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 1-byte storage area based on the value of the first register (step S853 in FIG. 66);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S854 in FIG. 66);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S855 in FIG. 66) is repeatedly executed until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”), thereby at least the first 1 The count value of the byte storage area and the count value of the second 1-byte storage area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above b), when the count value stored in the 1-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Thus, the count value after the subtraction remains “0” .

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to continue to update a plurality of types of storage areas only by executing the update process of the first register and the second register and the subtraction process of the count value.

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows various LED on a display board. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-3 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 4-7 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 0 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 1 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (input port 1 falling data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (specific information flags etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (medal management flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (an operation state flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (automatic bet number data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (interrupt counter etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (winning and replay condition apparatus information etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (blocker, hopper motor drive signal data, etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the timer value (external signal output time etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a flowchart which shows a program start process (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a power supply return process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows a main process (M_MAIN) process. It is a flowchart which shows a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) process. It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows interruption waiting (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows medal insertion waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows medal management processing (MS_MEDAL_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flowchart which shows a payment process (M_MEDAL_RET). It is a flowchart which shows medal one payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY). It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a start switch check (M_START_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows start switch reception (MS_START_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows a reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flowchart which shows reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP). It is a flowchart which shows medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart which shows a game completion | finish check process (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows an interrupt process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows a timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT). It is a flowchart which shows a passage sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows an external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows conditional device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT). It is a figure explaining the example of an output of conditional device information. It is a figure which shows the address arrangement | positioning of the timer value of 2nd Embodiment (AC), and is a figure corresponding to FIG. 31 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning and reference | standard address of 2nd Embodiment A. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment A, and a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement | positioning in the address arrangement | positioning and reference address of 2nd Embodiment B. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer arrangement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference address.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of condition devices (1BB, replays, small roles) to be drawn and their winning probabilities are unique lottery states. “RT transition” By shifting from RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be a lottery varies. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each type of replay is the same between one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, the combined value of the replay winning probability may be the same for one RT and the other RT.

In this embodiment, RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 (FIGS. 14 and 15 described later).
“Non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, “RT” includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays to be selected for lottery and the winning probability differ between non-inside and inside.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation | movement and 1BBB operation | movement are provided as RT in special game. In the present embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed in both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “combination” refers to a lottery target. In the present embodiment, a condition device is selected, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (has at least one winning combination).

The lottery condition devices include a “combination condition device” including any of “special roles (combines)” and a “winning and replay condition device” including either a small role or a replay. .
The “object condition device” includes any special combination. SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), CB (Type 2 Special Bonus; Challenge Bonus), SB (Single Bonus; Regular Bonus), which is a device that facilitates winning of small roles when a special role wins, 1BB (first type accessory continuous operation device; first type big bonus) and 2BB (second type accessory continuous operation device; second type big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-type accessory continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the first-type special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the second-type accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the second-type special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or the two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
In the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the “winning and replay condition device” includes either a small role or a replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the “object condition device” includes RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, and SB and CB that do not carry the winning information after the next game. In this embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning information is selected for an equipment condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over from the next game onwards, the winning information for special roles until the combination of symbols corresponding to that special role stops on the active line. Is carried over to the next game.
A game in which winning information is not won by the equipment condition device including any of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game is referred to as “non-inside”. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols for the special feature that has been elected is not yet stopped on the active line, that is, the game carrying the special feature's winning information is `` inside ''That's it. In the present embodiment, the game won in the accessory condition device is included in “non-inside”, but the game won in the accessory condition device may be included in “inside”.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a winning combination with a large number of payouts is won in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the active line) by the operation mode of the stop switch, Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT is awarded. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switches and / or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch” is a game in which a push order bell (small role B group, small role C group) is won, duplicate replay (replay B group, replay C group). ) Equivalent to the game at the time of winning.

Furthermore, at the time of pushing order bell winning, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct pushing order is the high-order bell (the number of payouts of the double winning bell group (small role group) is In some cases, a combination of symbols such as the most small combinations is displayed as a bell (small combination) that is most advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, there are cases where the Anme Bell wins and cases where the combination is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. The stop appearance (a combination of symbols on the active line; also referred to as “spilled eyes”) displayed when the role is missed is referred to as “pattern symbols” in the present embodiment, and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, in the case of replay overlap winning (replay B group, replay C group winning), different symbol combinations are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switches, but no overshoot occurs in the replay winning ("PB = 1" described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher replay winning probability, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols that maintain an RT with a high replay winning probability is displayed as `` correct answer ''. This is referred to as “push order” or “promotion push order”.
On the other hand, a push order in which a combination of symbols transitioning from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, RT having a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, RT having a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed is “incorrect This is referred to as “push order” or “fall (downgrade) push order”.

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-described “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the “instruction function” refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates the winning of a small role, the “instruction function” displays the correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (high eye bell) when winning the pressing order bell. In other words, it is not included to display the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of duplicate replay winning.

In the following embodiment, “instruction function” refers to a function that displays “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and “operation of the instruction function” displays the correct answer push order when the push order bell is won. , And displaying the correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay at the time of replay overlap win.
It is “display” to show the contents of the “instruction” to the player, and “notification” to notify the player of the instruction content. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player just because the “instruction” is not followed. However, if the correct answer pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the high-order bell may not win when the pressing bell wins, or an unfavorable replay may win when the replay overlap wins.

In addition, “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (small role B group, small role C group, replay B group, replay C A game that activates an instruction function in a game that is won by the group). Therefore, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to an instruction function, specifically a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later is a peripheral board (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function cannot be operated and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode cannot be displayed. However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).
In the normal section, the instruction function must not be operated, so that the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to a sub-control board described later.

Note that the “normal section” in the present embodiment is a game section in which it is possible to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section (lottery, etc.). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a first normal section (an advantageous section lottery available section) in which it is possible to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section (lottery etc.) and whether to shift to an advantageous section ( It is also possible to provide a second normal section in which a lottery or the like cannot be performed (an advantageous section lottery disabled period).
For example, when the transition condition to the second normal section is satisfied in the first normal section (for example, when a specific condition device is won), the transition to the second normal section may be mentioned. Alternatively, after the special role (for example, 1BB) operation is finished (after the special game is finished), it is possible to move to the second normal section uniformly or under a predetermined condition.
In addition, the transition from the second normal section to the first normal section is performed by digesting a predetermined number of games, winning a predetermined condition device, displaying a predetermined symbol combination, or staying in a predetermined RT (for example, staying in a plurality of RTs). The condition is that the transition to RT having the highest ratio is made.

In addition, the “advantageous section” is a gaming section having a performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that (an advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board. In other words, the advantageous section is a gaming section in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function can be activated) and an advantageous operation mode can be displayed (may be displayed). A game in an advantageous section may be referred to as a notification-enabled game. On the other hand, a game in the normal section or a game in the standby section may be referred to as a non-notifiable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an instruction content that the main control board performs or an effect contrary to the received signal related to the instruction function.

  In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not in operation) that can execute the instruction function operation game can be obtained. At least one or more games instruct the operating mode of the stop switch for winning the winning combination (small winning role 01) for the maximum payout number in a game selected as a condition device (small role B group) having an advantageous operating aspect It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small combination B group and a small combination C group are provided as so-called push order bell condition devices.
In the small combination B group, a small combination 01 which is a nine-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination can be won (may be missed) when the pressing order is incorrect.
On the other hand, in the small combination C group, a small combination 02 which is a three-piece combination always wins when the pressing order is correct, and a single combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

The game when the instruction function operation game is executed is when the accessory is not operated (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is “3”.
Further, when the specified number is “3”, the maximum payout number is “9” (at the time of winning the small role 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small role 01 is determined by operating the instruction function when the condition device (small role B group) that allows the small role 01 to win is activated. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during an advantageous section, in a game won by a condition device having an advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even if the game is won by the condition device having an advantageous operation mode during the advantageous section, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a gaming section when it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section after it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal zone may be shifted to the advantageous zone, the normal zone may be shifted to the standby zone, and the standby zone may be further transferred to the advantageous zone. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shift to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The waiting section can be transferred only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry the winning information after the next game and corresponds to the special combination. A game with a combination of symbols must be finished. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
In the standby section, the instruction function cannot be operated on the main control board, and a signal related to the instruction function cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board. When the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, when one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group) is executed, and when a predetermined number of games are executed Have
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
The condition for ending the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above but, for example, to perform an end (punk) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when the lottery is won. May be.

Alternatively, only by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and whether or not the instruction function operation game is executed is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery or the like) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is determined in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that point (limiter ), Shift to normal section.

  In addition, when the upper limit number of games is reached, even if the condition device (group B) having an advantageous operation mode that can obtain the maximum payout number (“9”) has not been won or won However, even if the position related to the maximum payout number (small role 01) has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section is always ended at that time (limiter operation), Transition to the section.

In the following embodiments, a detailed description of AT (instruction function operating section, notification game section) is omitted. The AT is a game section in which the instruction function is always activated or the instruction function is activated frequently when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is elected.
The relationship between the advantageous interval and the AT can be arbitrarily set. However, it is always necessary to be in the advantageous section during AT. For example, “advantageous section = AT” may be set. In this case, the AT is continued throughout the advantageous section.
Further, non-AT and AT may be repeated (at least one AT is executed) during the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, the advantageous zone is the chance zone (CZ), and when the AT execution condition is satisfied during the advantageous zone (CZ), the AT is executed, but when the AT execution condition is not satisfied, the AT is executed. It is also possible to end the advantageous section without any problem. However, as described above, the condition device (group B group) having an advantageous operation mode that can acquire the maximum payout number (“9” in the following embodiment) at least once when it has shifted to the advantageous section. When winning, it is necessary to activate the instruction function. However, if you have not won the small role B group at a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games) that is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section without operating the instruction function even once May be terminated.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the active line from the moment when the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (until the effective line is reached). Inability to pull in is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. = 1 ".

“PB = 1” has a case where all the reels are so in the role and a case where only the specific (partial) reels are.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbol is arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1” is obtained, exceeding 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”. In particular, the number of symbols of the reel of this embodiment is set to “20”, and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is “PB = 1”.

In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game, “N” game, “N + 1” game,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” game. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game is referred to as “current game”. Further, the game of the “N-1” game is referred to as “previous game”.
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

The “rendering rate” is a value calculated by the expected medal payout number / the number of medal inserted. When “1”, the current state is maintained, and when “1” is exceeded, the number of medals increases. If the number is less than “1”, the number of medals is decreased.
In addition, the “medal payout number expectation value” is calculated by the sum of “winning probability of combination × number of payouts” for all the combinations to be selected in the game.

  Furthermore, the “difference number” is a value calculated by “medal payout number (actually paid out medal number or expected medal payout number) −medal insertion number”. When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 3 when the accessory is not in operation (during a normal game). On the other hand, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 2 during the operation of the accessory (1BB). In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is carefully inserted from a medal insertion slot, or a bet switch is operated to bet a stored medal.
On the other hand, “reservation” refers to crediting medals into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like.

“Care” means that a player directly inserts a medal from a medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal by cleaning the medal from the medal insertion slot 43.
“Maintenance storage” means that a player stores medals by adding medals from the medal slot 43 (adding credits).
“Bet medal” means a bet medal.
“Reserved medals” refers to medals stored as credits.

The “reserved bet” is a game in which a player operates a bet switch 40, which will be described later, to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within a possible bet range of the game. To bet.
“Automatic betting” refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control process of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins. Note that the maintenance bet medals, the stored bets medals, and the stored medals can be settled thereafter, but the medals that are automatically bet by the replay winning are set so that the settlement cannot be performed.
“Inserting” means betting or storing medals, including the above-described care bets, care storage, storage bets, and automatic bets.
“Checkout” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player.

  “Payout” means that a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination, or a medal is paid out by the above-described payment. When paying out a medal to a player based on a winning combination of a combination, both storing it as a credit and paying out an actual medal from a payout slot (not shown) are included. The payout in the present embodiment is controlled so that “50” is the limit number and stored in the credit, and medals for which the stored number exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.

It is equivalent that the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment “pays” a medal to a player and that the player “acquires” a medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, “medal payout”, and from the player side, “medal acquisition”. For this reason, for example, there are a case where it is referred to as “payout (number)” and a case where it is referred to as “acquisition (number)”.
The “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but electronic information is used as the game medium in the case of a sealed game machine, for example. “Electronic information” means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a gaming machine as a gaming medium for performing the game.

In the MPU (one-chip microprocessor) of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used at the time of calculation.
Furthermore, an F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in this embodiment. The F register is composed of D0 to D7 bits, like the other registers. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The “carry flag” executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, logical product operation processing, logical sum operation processing, exclusive logical sum, etc.). When it occurs, it becomes “1”. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and no overflow or carry occurs according to the arithmetic result, “0” is set.
The “zero flag” is set to “1” when the calculation process is executed and the calculation result is “0”. On the other hand, when the calculation process is executed and the calculation result does not become “0”, it becomes “0”.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (in particular, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “H” at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in a decimal number is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in a binary number and “10 (H)” in a hexadecimal number. In addition, a numerical value indicating a decimal number is expressed as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the end symbols of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 includes an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not necessarily including only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are an input port 51 (input ports 0 to 2 described later) or an output port 52 (output port described later). 0 to 7 etc.). The input port 51 is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 50, and the peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game. Data (total number of games etc.) necessary to display management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the role, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like) are provided.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the one installed in the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent into the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43 a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

A closing sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. The insertion sensor 44 includes a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment, and the other insertion sensor 44b after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal was detected by the one insertion sensor 44a. It is comprised so that it may be detected by. Then, based on the timing when the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted.
In the following, when referring to the closing sensor 44 as a whole, it is referred to as a “closing sensor 44”. In addition, in the flowcharts and the like described later, the making sensor 44a may be abbreviated as “inserting sensor 1” and the making sensor 44b may be abbreviated as “inserting sensor 2”.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a checkout switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or specified number) medals are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  In addition, the specified number of this embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but two medals when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during operation of the accessory, if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, it is possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (pays out) a medal that has been bet and / or stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

On the display substrate 75, a storage number display LED 76, an acquisition number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted. These LEDs 76, 78, and 79 are provided in the vicinity of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. The LEDs 76, 78, and 79 are not necessarily provided on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A and 75B are provided, and any one of the display substrates 75 is provided. LEDs 76, 78, and 79 may be provided.
Details of the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 will be described later (FIG. 16).

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (cuts) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  In addition, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute part”).
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal was detected by one payout sensor 37a. It is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37b. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.
Hereinafter, when the entire payout sensor 37 is indicated, it is referred to as a “payout sensor 37”. Further, in a flowchart or the like to be described later, the payout sensor 37a may be abbreviated as “payout sensor 1” and the payout sensor 37b may be abbreviated as “payout sensor 2”.

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right (clockwise), and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing a setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the set value is incremented by “1”. In this embodiment, the setting value has setting 1 to setting 6, and during the setting change, every time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value becomes “1” → “2” →. “1” → ... and so on. Note that any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is confirmed.

In addition, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the switch is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialized, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52 (output port 4 in FIG. 20 described later).
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, as external signals, signals related to AT (advantageous section) and special games, errors that occurred in the slot machine 10 and recovery from power interruption (power turned on), etc., slot machine 10 signals indicating opening of the front door, a medal bet signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Information necessary for production output (control command) is transmitted.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
An effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the production.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs such as a lottery for production, various data, and the like as production data.

  The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and the back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 17). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is disposed on the front face of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. It displays game information (such as the number of games played and the number of games acquired during the operation of an accessory or in an advantageous zone).
The cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history), and the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. Used when

Subsequently, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, etc. will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 2, symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is “Bell A”.
As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, “blank” does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to “blank” is displayed.
Note that “Bell A”, “Bell B”, and “Bell C” are symbols having similar appearances, but different symbols.

3A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 17 provided on the front door (front door (not shown)) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design symbol). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing display lines for displaying combinations.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 is arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen. The number on the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 3B illustrates the designation of symbol positions in this specification. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 are referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from the top. ”,“ Middle left ”, and“ lower left ”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

  Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a symbol arrangement line when the reel 31 is stopped, and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the roles. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In this embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through “lower left stage” − “middle middle stage” − “upper right stage”) is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. Yes.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs according to the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1. When the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3. When the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one shown in FIG. There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to the line illustrated in FIG.

  4 to 9 are diagrams showing combinations of combinations of types (combinations included in a condition device lottered by a combination lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment. Note that FIG. 9 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers “101” to “101”) as combinations of symbols that are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won. “120”).

The roles of the present embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  In FIG. 4 to FIG. 9, “specified number 3” displayed in the number of payouts indicates the number of payouts when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not in operation, that is, the number of input during normal game). The “specified number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 2 (the number of inserted items during operation of the accessory, that is, during the special game). For example, the replay 01 with the number “3” indicates that a replay is performed with a specified number of three, and “−” with a specified number of two indicates that a lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 4, numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special combinations (combinations). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When winning 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game shifts to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game (operation of an accessory).
During a 1BB game (when an accessory is activated), it is an advantageous game for the player that can expect to win medals more than when the accessory is not activated because the payout rate is set to exceed “1”. .

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that allows a re-play to be performed while maintaining the number of medals inserted in this game (automatic betting of medals). For example, if the replay is won when the specified number of games is “3” and the specified number of games is “2” next time, the number of medals inserted in the current game is not maintained and the next time “2”, which is the prescribed number of games, may be automatically bet.
As shown in FIG. 4, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”).
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are transferred to other RTs when winning in a specific RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transition replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 wins at RT2, the next game is shifted to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). For this reason, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when Replay 03 wins at RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

  In addition, the replays 04 and 05 are first used as a control replay for the purpose of increasing the types of condition devices by overlapping a plurality of replays, and in the present embodiment, Replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop at the active line.

Furthermore, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and are included in the replay E of the condition device described later. When the replay E is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.
The replay 06 is a replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in the replay D of the condition device described later. When replay D is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-level bells) that are won in the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won, which will be described later. Further, the small roles 03 to 34 are small roles (small roles corresponding to Anme Bell) that can be won (PB ≠ 1) in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of pressing order bell winning.
Furthermore, the small combinations 35 to 38 are rare small combinations (small combinations corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the small combinations 39 and 40 are small combinations that can be awarded only when the specified number is 2, that is, when the combination is activated.

  As described above, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are not the combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the incorrect pressing order is determined when the pressing order is won. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols stops at an effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1, or RT3), the pattern symbol shifts RT (in this embodiment, shifts to RT2). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 always appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) at the time of the incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small role B group. However, other symbol combinations (not the combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The combination carried over is 1BB in this embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, the 1BB winning information is controlled to be carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, the winning combination of 1BB is carried over, while small plays and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when winning a small combination or replay, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  When the game is started, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cleans and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives all the motors 32 to control all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) controls the driving of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and responds to the result lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Thus, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.
“Condition device winning” is also referred to as a role lottery result, lottery result, winning number, winning result, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. And determining means for determining whether the condition device has been won or not and determining the selected condition device.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

10 to 13 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices that are drawn by the role lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combinations included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing when each condition device is won will be described in the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry the winning information to the next game, as well as the “game condition device” that is a condition device that includes any of the special roles that can carry the winning information to the next game. It consists of a “winning and replay condition device” which is a condition device that includes either a small role or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to 1BB winning in this embodiment.
The equipment condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning special role, the equipment condition device number “1” corresponds to the 1BBA winning, and the equipment condition device number “2” wins the 1BBB. Equivalent to.

For example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA is selected alone, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and a small role are duplicated. For example, when 1BBA and a small role D are won simultaneously, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number Becomes “26”.
When 1BB and a small combination or replay are won, the winning of the small combination or replay is given priority in this game (the priority can be arbitrarily set). In addition, since the winning of the small role or replay is valid only in the current game, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless winning.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition apparatus will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning role (so-called “losing”).
In addition, the replay A with the condition device number “1” is the single winning of the replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins regardless of push order (in any push order).

Replays B1 to B3 with condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay group B”), and replays C1 to C3 with condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as generic names). In this case, each of them is a duplicate winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is a duplicate winning including at least one of replay 01 or 02. And according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, it sets so that the kind of replay to win may differ.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the first left stop, and the replay 01 wins at a time other than the left first stop (middle or first right stop).

In the case of replay overlap winning, there is no concept of high / low for medal payout because the replay (replaying gamer) wins in any pushing order. However, for example, when the replay B1 is won at RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
When the replay C1 is won in RT3, RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, the RT is dropped (relegated) (shifted from RT3 to RT2) by winning the replay 03.

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single winning of replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins regardless of push order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate win of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the push order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the lottery is drawn at RT1 and the replay E is won during RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the extra lottery may not be executed, but the extra lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 11, the small combination A with the condition device number “10” is arranged in a so-called common bell, and the small combination 01 is a single winner. When winning the small combination A, the small combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
In addition, in FIGS. 11 to 12, the small roles B1 to B12 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role B group”) of the condition device numbers “11” to “22” correspond to so-called push order bells. The winning combination includes at least one of the small combination 01 (9-bell, 9-sheet combination) and the small combination 03 to 34 (one-sheet combination).

  When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 01 which is a high-ranking bell (9 bells, 9 winning combinations) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is the wrong answer pressing order, the small combination 03 which is a low-cost bell (one piece combination) according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). -34 wins, and when neither of the small roles wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to missing).

In FIG. 13, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “small role C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes as in the case of the small role B group. Corresponding to the order bell, the winning combination includes a small combination 02 (three bells, three combinations) and small combinations 03 to 10 (one combination).
When these condition devices are selected, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when the correct answer pressing order is set, “PB = 1” and the small combination 02 which is the high-ranking bell (three bells, three roles) wins a prize. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, “PB = 1”, and any one of the small roles 03 to 10 which is an Anme Bell (one-piece combination) wins. Therefore, when winning the small role C group, unlike the winning time of the small role B group, there is no case where a pattern symbol is displayed (missing). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where none of the small roles are won.

When winning the small role B group, there will be 9 payouts when the high-order bell wins, so there will be 3 in (inserts) and 9 out (payouts) in the correct push order. The number of sheets is “+6 sheets”. Therefore, the number of medals increases when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the condition device decreases the number of medals when the answer is incorrect (the number of payouts is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role C group, when the high-ranking bell wins, three payouts are made, so when the correct answer is pushed, there are 3 in (inserted number) and 3 out (paid out number). The difference number is “± 0”. Therefore, when the answer is correct in the pushing order, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order (the number of payouts is one), the condition device decreases the number of medals.

  In this way, the reason why both the push order bells for nine payouts and the push order bell for three payouts in the correct push order is provided for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, when the small order B group is won, the probability of winning a single role is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is set to be displayed (no payout when pattern symbols are displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order when winning the small role C group, one winning combination is awarded with “PB = 1”. In this way, it is possible to set the payout rate within an appropriate range by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers for the correct answer and the incorrect answer, and appropriately setting the winning probability. become.

The small combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small combination (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small role 35 and is set to “PB ≠ 1”.
Further, the small combination E1 with the condition device number “27” and the small combination E2 with the condition device number “28” correspond to a rare small combination (cherry) like the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double winning combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double winning combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38. When winning a small combination E1 or E2, two combinations (small combination 36 or 38) win the prize regardless of the push order.

The small combination F with the condition device number “29” is a combination that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a double winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 39. When winning the small role F, the small role 39, which is a 10-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G of the condition device number “30” is a combination that is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single winning combination of the small combination 40. When winning the small role G, the small role 40, which is a nine-piece role, wins with “PB = 1”.

  FIGS. 14 and 15 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and shows the numbers of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT. FIG. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 by “65536” gives the winning probability. For example, the number of 1BBA single winners is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”) for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1 BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 14 is a number table of condition devices that are common to the settings and that can be determined to shift to an advantageous section, or that can be added to an advantageous section (or that can be selected by lottery).
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
And, when a condition device common to the settings is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (determined to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous zone (decide to add during the advantageous zone) and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous zone (decide not to add during the advantageous zone) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 14 is provided with a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that decides not to move to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to determine to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 14, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to move to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 14, “◯” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “△” is determined to add the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “○” It may mean that a lottery is selected to shift to an advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean a lottery whether or not to add an advantageous section.

FIG. 15 shows conditional devices and their numbers that are not decided to shift to the advantageous section and that are not decided to add the advantageous section.
In this embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is selected, and the condition device shown in FIG. In the win, none of them decides to move to the advantageous section and decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 15, the numerical values of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated. However, as described above, actually, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6. A numeric value for each value is defined.

In FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal state, and therefore is drawn in non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Moreover, 1BBA and 1BBB have the case where it wins independently, and the case where it overlaps with small part D, E1, or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a case where it wins alone. A condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB that is drawn in RT4 is treated as a single winning combination of the small role D, E1, or E2. Therefore, the numbers that become the single winning of the small role D in RT4 are “580” to “585” in total, and the numbers that become the single winning of the small role E1 in RT4 are “1030” in total, The numbers that become the single winning of the small role E2 in RT4 are "310" to "370" in total.
Also, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section based on winning of 1BBB or to add an advantageous section. Never happen.

Replay D is drawn only during the 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process proceeds to RT1. When the replay E is won at RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so that it does not appear in other RTs, the replay E is drawn in lots only at RT1.
Further, the small combinations D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not operated, and are not drawn when the accessory is operated.
On the other hand, the small combinations F and G are not drawn when the combination is not activated, but are drawn only when the combination is activated.

  In addition, in FIG. 14, the total number of 1BBA single winners is “30”, but in this embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “10” determined not to shift. That is, in the case of winning 1BBA alone, if the number “20” is won, and if the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where 1 BBA is elected alone, if the number “10” is elected, the advantageous section is not elected.

In addition, when 1 BBA is elected alone during the advantageous section, it is decided to add the advantageous section for both the number “20” and “10”.
Similarly, the number of the winning combination of the small role E1 is “1000” in total, but in this embodiment, the number “250” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a numeric value “750” that is determined not to be transferred to “”.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the single winning number for the small role E1 is set to one “1000” (not divided into the “250” and the “750”), and the small role E1 is won. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. For example, it may be decided to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 25% and not decide to move to the advantageous interval with a probability of 75%. In this way, it is possible to provide a number that is won in the advantageous section from the beginning and a number that is not won in the advantageous section, but the value itself is a single value, and when the number is won, the transition is made to the advantageous section. You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do.
In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the interior), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when winning the small role D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 14). .

In FIG. 15, when 1BBB is elected alone and 1BBB and small role D are both elected, neither of the determinations regarding the advantageous section is performed. However, as will be described later, an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after transition to RT1).
The small role E2 has a case where it wins redundantly with 1BBB and a case where it wins alone, but neither makes a decision regarding an advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, at the time of winning the small role E1, there is a case where the determination regarding the advantageous section is performed for both the single winning of the small role E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, the replay A, replay B group, and replay C group condition devices are common in setting, but are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 14 and 15, at the time of winning the replay condition device, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including lottery) or decided to add an advantageous section (including lottery) ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 15, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between setting 1 and setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), and replay A, replay B group, The replay group C may be set separately.

  In FIG. 15, replay A is drawn in all RTs when the accessory is not in operation. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay group C is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, small combination B group, and small combination C group all have a setting difference between setting 1 and setting 6, but the numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 15, in setting 1 and setting 6, setting 6 has a higher probability of winning 1BB and small combination. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the “Replay” table, the winning probability of replay is highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the medal is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of pushing order bell winning, but the gaming state is reduced by the replay winning with less decrease of the medal. .

Further, the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are all set in a condition device having a setting difference. Here, the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role A is “250”, and the number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small role B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12)”. It is. Therefore, the small combination A has a larger number difference than the small combination B group. Thereby, the difference of the payout rate according to a set value can be provided reliably by making the direction of the number of the small combination A which does not have a winning difference according to a pushing order into a larger value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning the small role A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the correct answer in the pushing order when winning the small role B group are set identically (described later), the small role A The set value cannot be estimated by counting the number of winning (winning).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of winning the small role B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small role C group. Here, when the specified number is 3, the maximum payout number is 9, and during the advantageous section, at least 1 instruction function operation game in which the payout number is 9 (maximum payout number with the specified number of 3) is 1 Need to be executed once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when the small group B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small role B group higher than the winning probability of the small role C group, it is won by one instruction function operation game (small role C group, replay B group, replay C group) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in an advantageous section that ends only with a game (excluding played games). Furthermore, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be ended because the small part B group has not been won once during the predetermined number of times, even though it is an advantageous section that ends by executing a predetermined number of games. be able to.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the replay B1 is won, the two winning flags Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the conditional device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-inside medium game, when the small role B1 is won, the small role 01, the small role 03, the small role 10, the small role 11, the small role 18, the small role 19 and the small role included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other combinations are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than 1BB and replay are not carried over, so even if the winning combination for the small role or replay is won in this game, and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, the current game will end. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, if 1BB is won in the game this time and the winning flag relating to the 1BB won is once turned on, the ON state is maintained until the 1BB wins, Turned off when 1BB wins.

  Also, for example, when the winning lottery means 61 duplicates 1BBA and small role D, the winning flag of the small role 35 corresponding to 1BBA and small role D is turned on, and there is no case where both roles win in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, regardless of whether the small role 35 has won or not, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on and the winning flag of the small role 35 is turned off.

Furthermore, for example, when the 1BBA is won by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in this game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. .
Furthermore, in the next game, when winning the small role A1, in addition to 1BBA carrying over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and when 1BBA does not win at the end of this game, 1BBA The winning flag is kept on, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination lottery means 61.
The “push order” of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, when winning the small role B group and the small role C group, it refers to the pressing order in which the high eye bell is won. In addition, when replay overlap is won, it refers to a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not fall to an unfavorable RT.
Note that the push order instruction number selection means 63 may select the push order instruction number in any of the advantageous section and the normal section. The push order instruction number may be selected.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section. Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section (note that the push order instruction number may or may not be selected in the normal section), the push order instruction number is stored in the sub control board. 80 will not be sent.
In the present embodiment, each condition device has a unique push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of the lottery of the condition devices, it is also conceivable to send the winning winning and replay condition device numbers themselves to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers (and thus information on the correct push order) won in the current game.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined in advance. Then, after lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

  The reel control means 65 controls to start rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to on / off of the winning flag in the current game after lottery of the condition device is performed by the winning lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to be within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 2, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage (on the active line), that four frames ahead, that is, the fifth “bell” The symbols up to “B” can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bita stop) to No. 5 (4 tops) are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 frames from the symbol next to the symbol positioned on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “replay” of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage, from the next symbol, that is, the second “blank”, Up to “Replay” No. 6, which is the symbol ahead of the four frames, becomes a symbol that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is 4 frames from the symbols positioned on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and according to a predetermined priority order, The highest priority drawing pull-in control is performed.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which one of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), what The stop position is determined in advance such that the number of symbols is stopped at the lower left stage by controlling the movement of only the symbols (in the number of frames).

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 2, in all the reels 31, four “replays” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “replay” of all the reels 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four of “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
In the middle reel 31, four “bells C” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “bell C” of the middle reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “Bell A” and “Bell B” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four “cherries” are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “cherry” of the right reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement.
In addition, on the left reel 31, four of “Black 7” and “Watermelon” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of “blue 7” and “cherry” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these four symbols is “PB = 1”.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, “cherry” is arranged at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and is not “PB = 1”.
Similarly, with respect to “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 have a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that a combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line.

  The replay A table is used when replay A is won (replay 01 is a single winner), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the reels are set so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. 31 stop positions are defined. The symbols of the reels 31 related to the replay 01 and replays 02 to 06 described later have a “PB = 1” arrangement in all the reels 31. Accordingly, the replay that is always won at the time of winning the replay (when a plurality of replays are duplicated, one of the replays that is won repeatedly) always wins.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of replay B1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 01 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 10).

First, in the game using the replay B1 table, at the time of the first left stop, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, “Replay” stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of middle second stop, “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the time of the third stop on the right, “cherry” is stopped at the upper right. In this case, “Replay” stops at the lower right. As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Replay” − “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 02 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle middle”-“lower right”.

On the other hand, in the game using the replay B1 table, “blue 7” or “cherry” is stopped at the middle and middle level during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle and upper stages. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “replay” stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). As a result, “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Replay” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 01 is won. Furthermore, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “upper left”-“middle upper”-“upper right”.

In a game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control as that at the middle first stop is performed at the first right stop.
Further, with respect to the replay B2 table at the time of replay B2 winning and the replay B3 table at the time of replay B3 winning, the replay 02 is won at the correct push order and the replay 01 is awarded at the incorrect push order.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of replay C1 winning, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay 01 is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 10).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the active line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, and thus the description is omitted.
In the game using the replay C1 table, “replay” is stopped at the middle and middle stage during the middle first stop (“PB = 1”). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops in the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “Replay” stops in the middle right. As a result, “Bell A / Bell B” − “Replay” − “Watermelon” is stopped on the active line, and Replay 03 is won. Further, “replay”-“replay”-“replay” stops in “middle left”-“middle middle”-“middle right”.

In a game using the replay C1 table, the same control as at the middle first stop is performed at the right first stop.
Furthermore, with respect to the replay C2 table when the replay C2 is selected and the replay C3 table when the replay C3 is selected, the replay 01 is awarded when the push order is correct and the replay 03 is awarded when the push order is incorrect. .

The replay D table is used in a game when the replay D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped at the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined. The replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the replay E table is used in the game when the replay E is won, and the reel 31 is set so that the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. 31 stop positions are defined. In this case, either “Replay 04” or “05” can be stopped by “PB = 1”.

  The small role A table is used in a game when winning the small role A, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the reel 31 so that the small role 01 is stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. The stop position is determined. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell C” − “replay”, and “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. When “Black 7 / Watermelon” stops at the lower left, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the middle left. Furthermore, when “Replay” stops at the upper right, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the right middle. Therefore, when winning the small role 01, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Bell C”-“Bell A / Bell B” are stopped at “Left middle stage”-“Middle middle stage”-“Right middle stage”.

  The small role B1 table is used in the game when winning the small role B1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (at the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), a single combination included in the winning combination (when the small combination B1 is won, any of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line or stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game using the small role B1 table (at the correct answer in the pressing order), it is the same as the small role A table, so the description is omitted.
Even when the following small role B2 table to small role B12 table is used, the same stop control as that of the small role A table is performed when the correct answer is pressed.
As a result, at the time of winning the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning time, the small role 01 always wins, and “left middle”-“middle middle”-“right middle” “Bell A / Bell B” − “Bell C” − “Bell A / Bell B” stops. Therefore, even if the small role 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small role A is won or the correct answer is the push order when the small role B group is won.

In addition, even during the advantageous section, when the small role A is won, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is determined whether the player is the small role A or the small role B group. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning number of the small combination A. Therefore, the set value can be estimated by counting the number of winnings of the small combination A. However, if the stoppage is the same between the winning combination of the small role A and the correct answer in the small role B group winning, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small role A. Can not guess.

In the game using the small role B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, at the time of winning the small combination B1, as shown in FIG. 11, there are seven small combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26, and the combinations of symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 piece)
Small part 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, as a stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small combinations having different payout numbers are selected, the following method is exemplified.
As the first priority, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination (of the reel 31) can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is set to “number priority” ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the “number priority” is to stop (pull in) the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts among the combinations of symbols that are selected in duplicate, with priority on the line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 corresponds to a combination of symbols (9 sheets) having the largest number of payouts.
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is maximized.

  For example, when the small combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is performed, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 related to the winning combination on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols for the medium reel 31 of the selected small role, but there is only one effective line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

Therefore, when the small combination B group is selected, the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets when the correct answer is in the pressing order, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. When the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number, the small combination 01 (nine-piece combination) is configured so that a single combination can be won without winning (so that it may be missed).
Thus, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that priority is given to the number of sheets in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in the present embodiment), and priority is given to the number in other pressing orders (incorrect answer pressing order in the present embodiment). Depending on the number, priority is given to the number of sheets or priority is given to the number.

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of middle first stop (when pressing order is incorrect), stop either "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the active line and stop on the active line The maximum number of possible symbol combinations is two each. For example, if the “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small role 03 or 11 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of two symbols, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is always stopped. Can be made.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 11 can win.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell A” or “Bell C” on the active line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, “Bell A” is arranged at 15th and 0th, and “Bell C” is arranged at 18th. For this reason, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0, “Bell A” or “Bell C” can be stopped on the active line, When the number is 1 to 10, “Bell A” or “Bell C” cannot be stopped at the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell A” can be stopped without stopping “Bell C”, the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are No. 11 to No. 19 and No. 0. Is always stopped at the active line.
In this way, the reason for stopping “Bell A” without stopping “Bell C” is to make it possible to display a pattern symbol to be described later when the winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop. This is because the pattern symbol cannot be displayed if the “bell C” is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when “bell A” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that any pattern symbol is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “Bell A”, the symbol of the left reel 31 is “Black 7” or “Watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line. Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, stop “Bell A” if the pattern of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13. “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is randomly stopped, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A”-“Bell A”-“Rotating”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the active line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell A” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line during the first stop during the small role B1 winning (when the push order is incorrect). In this case, at this time, the small combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 18, on the active line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, “Bell B” is arranged at Nos. 5 and 10, and “Red 7” is arranged at No. 7. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, “Bell B” or “Red 7” can be stopped on the active line, otherwise In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. In particular, in this embodiment, since “Bell B” can be stopped without stopping “Red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 is No. 1 to No. 10 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Always stops “Bell B” on the active line.

  On the other hand, if the “bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “Bell B” is “Black 7” or “Watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” of “Black 7” or “Watermelon” on the left reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell B"-"Rotating". .
Further, before the third stop on the right, when “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line. Bell B "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop “Bell B” on the effective line, the pattern of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of No. 14 to No. 18, or No. 19 to No. 3. “Bell B” can be stopped, and “Bell B” cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is set to the effective line. Stop ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of the first stop during the winning of the small role B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol relating to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of small first B1 winning at the time of the middle stop (when the push order is incorrect)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.

Next, the case of the right first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is two each. And become the maximum. For example, if “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small role 03 or 19 can be won. “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the total of the two symbols. it can.
First, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, at this time, the small role 03 or 19 can be won.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell A” or “bell C”, which is a symbol related to the small role 03 or 19, on the active line. Here, in the same manner as described above, priority is given to the stop of “Bell A”. “Bell A” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" or "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Rotating"-"Bell A" .
Further, in the case of “Bell A”-“Rotating”-“Bell A” before the middle third stop, when “Bell A” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell A "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop “Bell A” on the active line, stop “Bell A” if the pattern of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 5 to No. 14. “Bell A” cannot be stopped within the other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell A” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” − “Bell A” − “Bell A” is obtained, and the small role 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of 2 symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

Further, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is first stopped. In this case, at this time, the small combination 10 or 26 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell B” or “red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 26, on the active line. Here, priority is given to the stop of “Bell B”. “Bell B” can be stopped with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7” or “Watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the total of two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right and the second stop on the left, it is “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”. .
Further, in the case of “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” before the middle third stop, when “Bell B” can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “ Bell B "is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped randomly, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “½”. When “Bell B” is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell B” − “Bell B” − “Bell B” is obtained and the small role 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of “bell B”-“rotating”-“bell B”, when “bell B” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “blue 7” or “cherry” "Is stopped at the active line (" PB = 1 "in the total of two symbols). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the effective line.
Further, in the case of “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one piece with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1”. The symbol relating to one winning combination can be stopped with a probability of “/ 2”. Furthermore, when the symbol related to one combination cannot be stopped, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the first stop right at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect)
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Minor Role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small part 10)
Either.
The winning rate and the pattern symbol stop rate are the same as those in the middle first stop.
Therefore, when winning the small role B1, the small role 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (at the correct push order). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), one winning combination wins with a probability of “1/4” and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. .

In the case of winning the small role B2, the small role B2 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included at the time of winning the small role B2 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C" during the left stop. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Bell A” — “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Bell A” — “Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, since “Bell B” can be stopped when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 09 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, since “bell A” can be stopped when “bell C” can be stopped, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When "Bell A"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B2, when the push order is incorrect,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Minor 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B3, the small role B3 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B3 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “bell B” or “red 7” during the left stop. Here, similarly to the above, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell B" when stopping right. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, similarly to the above, “bell A” is stopped without stopping “bell C”. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when "Bell A" can be stopped at the time of right stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “bell A” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C” at the left stop. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell A”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 05 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7”. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped when it can be stopped during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B3,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (Minor 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Either.

In the case of winning the small role B4, the small role B4 table is provided as in the case of winning the small role B1. The winning roles included when winning the small role B4 are:
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 photos)
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first stop at the left (at the time of pushing correct answer), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped during the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” during the left stop. Stop “Bell B”. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Bell A” − “Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”.

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" at the right stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell A” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped during the middle first stop. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, either “Bell A”-“Bell B”-“Rotating” or “Black 7 / Watermelon”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”.

When "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when it can be stopped when it stops right. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Also, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Bell B” − “Rotating”, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of first right stop at the time of winning the small role B4 (at the time of pushing order incorrect answer), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number.
First, when “Bell A” is stopped at the first stop on the right, priority is given to stopping either “Bell B” or “Red 7” at the left stop. Here, “Bell B” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell B” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A”.

When "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "Bell A" during an intermediate stop. As a result, the small role 07 is won. Further, when “Bell A” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell A” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first stop on the right. In this case, when left-stopping, priority is given to stopping either “Bell A” or “Bell C”. Here, “Bell A” is stopped in the same manner as described above. When “Bell A” cannot be stopped, “Black 7 / Watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, “Bell A” — “Rotating” — “Bell B” or “Black 7 / Watermelon” — “Rotating” — “Bell B”.

When “Bell A” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, “Bell B” is stopped when it is possible to stop “Bell B” during the middle stop. As a result, the small role 06 is won. Further, when “Bell B” cannot be stopped during the middle stop, “Blue 7 / Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “Black 7 / Watermelon” − “Rotating” − “Bell B” is reached, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped during the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, when winning the small role B4,
Single character combination: Winning with a probability of 1/4 Pattern design: Stopping with a probability of 3/4.
In addition, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
Either.

In the following, a detailed description of each of the small roles B5 to B12 tables at the time of winning the small roles B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small role B5 table used at the time of winning the small role B5, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of "1/4" when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
Also, in the small role B6 table used when winning the small role B6, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct push order answer, and the small role 04 with the probability of “1/4” at the incorrect push order answer. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B7 table used when winning the small role B7, the small role 01 wins during the first stop during the correct push order, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the correct push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
Furthermore, in the small role B8 table used when winning the small role B8, the small role 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct pressing order, and the small role 06 with a probability of “¼” when the incorrect pressing order is correct. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

In the small role B9 table used when winning the small role B9, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. The winning combination 10 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B1 winning.
In the small role B10 table used when winning the small role B10, the small role 01 wins when the right first stop is in the correct push order, and the small role 04 has a probability of “¼” when the incorrect push order is correct. Or, the small role 09 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B2 winning.

Furthermore, in the small role B11 table used when winning the small role B11, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role has a probability of 1/4 when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small role 08 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B3 winning.
In addition, in the small role B12 table used when winning the small role B12, the small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small role 06 has a probability of “¼” when the push order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small combination that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as in the small combination B4 winning.

  As is clear from the above, one combination that can be awarded in the case of incorrect answer in the pressing order at the time of winning the small combination B group is the small combination 03 to the small combination 10. Therefore, other small roles included in each condition device are not won. This setting is related to a single combination that can be won when winning a small combination C group to be described later.

  The small role C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 02 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first left stop (in the correct push order), Except at the time of the first stop (at the time of incorrect push order), so as to stop the single role included in the winning combination (any of the small roles 03 to 10 at the time of the small role C1 winning) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  When winning a small role C1 (same for small roles C2 and C3, which will be described later), in the correct push order, as in the case of winning the small role B group, the small role 02 (three-time role) is to be won in the priority order. Control. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role 02 is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Watermelon”, and “PB = 1” in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small combination 02 can always be won in the correct answer in the pressing order.

  Further, when the small combination C1 is won, when the answer is incorrect (the middle or right first stop), control is performed so that the single combination (small combination 03 to 10) is won with priority on the number. Here, as shown in FIG. 5, the combination of symbols of the small roles 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols “Bell A” or “Bell B” for each reel 31. Furthermore, among the combinations of symbols of the small roles 03 to 10, in any reel 31, there are four “Bell A” and four “Bell B”, and either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is selected. Even if it is stopped, the number priority condition is satisfied. In particular, when the small combination C2 and small combination C3 are won, the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 are included, respectively, but even if these small combinations are included in the winning combination, the type of the symbol with priority on the number does not change. In all the reels 31, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is “PB = 1” as a sum of two symbols. Therefore, any of the small roles 03 to 10 can always be won.

  As described above, when winning the small combination C1, the small combination 02 (three-piece combination) wins when the correct answer is in the pushing order (“PB = 1”), and when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order, one of the small roles 03 to 10 (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") won't cause a spill (stop of pattern symbols) unlike the small role B group winning.

  The small role C2 table and the small role C3 table respectively used when winning the small role C2 and winning the small role C3 are the same as the small role C1 table. As shown in FIG. 13, the middle first stop is in the correct push order when the small role C2 is won, and the right first stop is in the correct push order when the small role C3 is won. Since the stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as that for winning the small role C1, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, one single combination (small role 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role B group is won and one single role that can be stopped when the push order is incorrect when the small role C group is won ( The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. Thereby, it is not possible to determine which of the small role B group or the small role C group is won in the game only by looking at the winning of the small roles 03 to 10.

  The small role D table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role D, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 35 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not related. As shown in FIG. 6, the combination of symbols of the small role 35 is the same as “watermelon”. “Watermelon” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB = 1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game using the small role D table, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “watermelon” stops on the active line, the “watermelon” stops on the active line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, and the small part 35 is lost.

  The small role E1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small role 36 or 38 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, a so-called middle-stage cherry stop shape is formed (so that “cherry” stops at the left middle stage). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop.

  The winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (further, the small role E2 includes the small role 37 at the time of winning the small role E2, which will be described later). The given number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by a predetermined arbitrary stop control. For this reason, control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 36 is given priority during the left or middle first stop, and control is performed so that the winning of the small combination 38 is given priority during the first right stop.

  In FIG. 2, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when “Cherry” is stopped in the middle left, “Blank” or “Red 7” is stopped in the active line in the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small role 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when “Red 7” of No. 7 is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop (“Cherry” is stopped at the left middle stage), “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is effective when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7”, or “Blank” (4 symbols combined, “PB = 1)) is stopped at the active line. As a result, the small role 36 is won.
In addition, when the second or twelfth “blank” is stopped at the lower left when the left reel 31 is stopped (“cherry” is stopped at the left middle), when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is stopped on the active line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” is stopped on the active line. . As a result, the small role 36 is won.

Also during the middle first stop, the stop control is performed in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the symbols related to the small role 36 are stopped when the middle and right reels 31 are “PB = 1”, and the left reel 31 has a case where “red 7” or “blank” stops and a case where they do not stop ( “PB ≠ 1”).
However, when “Red 7” or “Blank” cannot be stopped in the lower left stage at the first left or middle stop, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped by “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is “Bell A / Bell B” − “Blue 7 / Cherry” − “Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank”, and the small role 38 wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small role E1 table is used, the winning of the small role 38 is given priority when the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, “Bell A / Bell B”-“Blue 7 / Cherry”-“Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank” stops and the small role 38 wins with “PB = 1”. .
Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the right, even if “Cherry” can be stopped at the left middle when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Berry A” or “Bell” is not stopped at the lower left. B ”(in this case,“ Cherry ”is not stopped in the middle left) is stopped.

The small role E2 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small role 36 or 38 (or the small role 37) is stopped on the effective line. The stop position is determined.
Therefore, since the small combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small combination E1 table, the same stop position determination table can be used.

  Alternatively, in the case of the first left stop, only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped at the lower left stage (when the middle cherry is stopped), “replay” is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and for the right reel 31, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped. Thereby, the small role 37 wins a prize. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control can be performed to determine whether the small role E1 is won or the small role E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is stopped.

The small role F table is used in a game when the small role F is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small roles 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In the present embodiment, the small combination F is drawn by lottery only during 1BB operation.
Further, the small combination F table performs stop control with priority on the number of sheets, regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding the two symbols “Cherry” or “Bell C”, so that the small role 39 wins with “PB = 1”.

  The small role G table is used in a game at the time of winning the small role G, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small role 40 is stopped on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small combination 40 is composed of a combination of symbols arranged with “PB = 1” for all the reels 31, the small combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “1” is won (1BBA alone is elected), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and the current game is not won, and the reel 31 is stopped. The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the effective line and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA is not stopped on the effective line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is “red 7” in all the reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), “red 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pushed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when a game is performed when the equipment condition device number “2” is won (1BBB single winner), or when 1BBB is won before the previous game, and this game is not won, and the reel 31 Within the range of stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBB is not stopped on the effective line. The combination is determined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless they are pushed.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or replay are won, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and the small role or replay was won in the current game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, first of all, if it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line with priority given to stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small roles or replays that have been won, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a combination or a replay to an effective line is mentioned. The stop control for stopping the symbols of both 1BB and the small role or replay on the active line is up to the second stop, and at the third stop, the control is performed so that 1BB, the small role or the replay is won. The role of will not win twice.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small role or replay symbols on the active line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning 1BB Stop control that gives priority to stopping the symbol on the active line (opposite to the above).

  Third, although priority is given to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, When the winning 1BB symbol can be simultaneously stopped on the active line, stop control is performed in which the symbol is stopped at that position.

  When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and a small role or replay of “PB = 1” are duplicated (when winning simultaneously), the winning 1BB symbol and the small role or replay It is not necessary to perform control for stopping both of the symbols on the effective line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small role or replay symbol of “PB = 1” is stopped on the effective line. Accordingly, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small role E1 or E2 is respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of the present embodiment are overlapped, or when the 1BBB and the small role E2 are simultaneously selected. It is also possible to execute stop control for winning a prize.

Returning to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won a prize). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the active line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the winning combination determining means 66 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, and when the winning combination is won. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or credits are added. Further, at the time of replay winning, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when each game and all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Is.
As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). And as shown in FIG.14 and FIG.15, the kind (number) of the condition apparatus chosen by lot and its winning probability differ for every RT.

  In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set at the time of stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of winning the RT transition combination, that is, at all stops (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbols are stopped when all the reels 31 are stopped, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 during the entire stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won of 1BB. Also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game won by 1BB.

The non-internal game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. Further, the game in the inside corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the advantageous section and AT, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled so as to stay at RT3. However, when a player presses the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, etc., it stays at RT2. In some cases. In the case of an advantageous section that ends with only one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, replay B group, and replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, in RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding games won in the small role C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed, and the advantageous section may be terminated. Of course, you may make it stay at RT3 fundamentally during an advantageous area. In addition, during an advantageous section and non-AT, in principle, the user may stay at RT3, or may stay at a specific RT, and the staying RT may not be limited.

  It may be possible to shift to a specific RT (for example, RT3) based on satisfying the advantageous section transition condition, or to a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT) based on satisfying the advantageous section end condition. It may be possible. In such a configuration, when the transition condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the next game shifts to the inside, the transition to the internal RT (for example, RT4) may be performed instead of the specific RT. Good. If the advantageous section continues after the bonus ends, RT after the bonus ends may be RT3.

In the non-RT, non-internal game of RT1 to RT3, a lottery of an accessory condition device is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal game.
In addition, when 1BB wins in the game won for 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started when the current game is completely stopped, and in this case, RT4 (internal game) is not passed.

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When 1BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBA is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set such that the number of payouts exceeds 150.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation. When it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 terminates the 1BBA operation. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The 1BBB operation is the same as described above. When the operation proceeds during the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition for the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when determining that more than 200 medals have been paid out, the RT control means 68 determines that the operation end condition of 1 BBB is satisfied, Control to shift to RT1 from the next game.

  In addition, the replay is not included in the count of 150 sheets or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 14, during 1BB operation, replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of replay winning is not counted as the number of payouts. For this reason, the number of games during the operation of 1BB increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the winning probability of Replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation More than the expected number of games in the middle.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, the RB is continuously operated. The RB is ended when either of two winning combinations or two games are satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition for the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of the small combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small combination E2 is won and the small combination 36 or 38 wins, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games until setting 6 reaches the end condition (exceeding 150) during 1 BBA operation is greater than setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, since the expected value for winning Replay D is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1, the probability that the advantageous section is added increases. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized when the 1BB winning is carried over, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until a pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, when the small role B group is drawn and one of the small role B groups is won and the selected small role is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, RT1 is maintained until a pattern symbol is displayed, as in non-RT. When a pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT having the highest stay rate in the normal section. In RT2, when the Replay B group is won and Replay 02 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won and the game is continued until the replay 03 wins. In RT3, when a pattern symbol is displayed or when Replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and not in the interior), most people go back and forth between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying at RT2 is the highest in terms of probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game moves to RT4 (inside).

  In addition, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game decided to move to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3 (in principle, RT3 will be maintained during the advantageous section). In the case of staying), when the replay group C is won, the instruction function is activated, and the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed. Thereby, the fall to RT2 is prevented. Further, when winning the small role B group, the correct function pressing order for winning the small role 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when winning the small role C group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small role 02 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by operating the instruction function while operating the instruction function as described above, when the replay group B is won. The push order is displayed, and control is performed so as to shift to RT3 (when staying at RT3 in principle during the advantageous section).
In addition, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to an advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function In the game that can be operated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the instruction function is not operated, and it waits until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when shifting to RT2, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as described above (when staying at RT3 in principle during the advantageous section).

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-inner middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-inner middle game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the advantageous section is simultaneously selected. Decide to migrate. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to being in the non-inside, and it is not determined to move from the normal section to the advantageous section in the interior.

In addition, as described above, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined according to the winning lottery result (the winning condition device), the condition device having a setting difference cannot be selected as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, there is a case where the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section on the condition that the condition device common to the setting is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14, for example, when 1BBA is elected alone, there are a case where it is determined to shift to an advantageous section and a case where it is not determined to shift. When the random number value included in the range of the numerical value “20” is extracted from the numerical value “30” assigned to the single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to move to the advantageous interval, and the numerical value “10”. When a random value included in the range is extracted, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous interval. “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and single winning of small role E1 are the same as above.

  Further, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in any case. In addition, when winning these condition devices, it is also possible not to add an advantageous section uniformly, but to make an extra lottery, or to draw whether or not to make an extra lottery However, in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of description, the advantageous section is added uniformly.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, the end condition of the advantageous section is not determined by the number of games, but end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins for the small role B group, the number of times the instruction function is activated, etc.) Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which end conditions are set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it may be determined as follows.
When 1BBA is elected alone (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games. When 1BBA + small role D overlaps win (place number "5"): The initial value is 1BB Counting from the end of the game and shifting to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small role E1 overlapping winning (number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and transitions to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When winning combination D alone (place number “50”): Advantageous section with initial value of 150 games When winning small role E1 alone (placement “250”): Advantageous section with initial value of 100 games, or one small combination Any of the advantageous sections that end with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be determined by lottery. Or, it is included in the range of the number “120” in the number “250”. When the random value to be extracted is extracted, the initial value is 10 (If the random number value included in the range of the number “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, in order to give a premiere feeling when winning the small role D, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D is small. It is set more than when winning the role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1 may be set larger than that at the time of winning the small role D.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when winning 1BBA alone, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and when the small role E1 is elected alone (number “250”). ) Is added to the number of games by “50”, and when the small role E1 is elected alone (number “750”), the number of games is added by “20”, and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, in the normal section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “¼” (“250” in the total number “1000”). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the single winning probability of the small role E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries, but the probability of determining to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
In other words, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to move to the advantageous section.
In contrast to this embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small role E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability that it will be decided to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small role E2 is elected alone in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Accordingly, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherry appears is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, the player can be given an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination whose winning number is common to all settings (except when 1BBA and small role D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the winning number.
In this case, when the common 1BBA is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference in the advantageous section is won and 1BBB is in operation, it is stipulated that the advantageous section cannot be added during the operation of 1BBB. It is stipulated that when 1BBA and small part D having a setting difference in the advantageous section are overlapped and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section during operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during 1BBA operation, the winning probability of small role A is lower in setting 6 than setting 1, and the winning probability of small role E2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. For this reason, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout exceeding 150, the number of games (expected value) during the operation of 1BBA is larger in setting 6 than in setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if the replay D is selected so that the advantageous section is added, the expected value of the number of times that the replay D is won during the 1BBA operation is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation than setting 1.
As described above, the operation end condition of 1 BBA is set to have paid out over 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected number of payouts per game during 1 BBA operation is approximately “8.664” for setting 1 and approximately “8.557” for setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games that the payout number reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to add the advantageous section unconditionally, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that an advantageous section is added each time a certain number of games elapses. Even in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to add the advantageous section.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during the operation of 1BBB.
Further, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the process shifts to non-RT. When the process shifts to non-RT, the process stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed, shifts to RT2. That is, it does not go through RT1 after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after the end of the operation of 1BBB, the process shifts to RT1, and stays at RT1 until the pattern symbol is displayed. In RT1, the replay E is selected by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 14, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. Thereby, after the end of the 1BBB operation, the addition probability of the advantageous section becomes higher than after the end of the 1BBA operation. If the number of games added to the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance after the end of the 1BBA operation and after the end of the 1BBB operation.

  And, when the advantageous section is maintained and the process proceeds to RT1, until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the pattern symbol Wait until appears. When a pattern symbol is displayed at RT1 and the process proceeds to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When the transition is made to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, the small role 01 wins by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group, and the pattern (unless there is a push order mistake) The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when it transfers to RT1 during an advantageous area, it can also continue to stay at RT1 until an advantageous area is complete | finished. Not until the advantageous period ends, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group, and after the predetermined number of games, the game that can operate the instruction function until the pattern symbol is displayed ( For example, when the small role B group is won), the instruction function may not be operated, and the pattern symbol may be displayed.

Further, when the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED (not shown in FIG. 1) is lit until a predetermined timing comes. When it is other than the advantageous section (normal section or standby section), the advantageous section display LED is controlled to be turned off.
When the advantageous section control means 69 decides to shift to the advantageous section first, after the game decided to shift to the advantageous section ends (when all reels 31 stop and there is a payout, the medal The advantageous section display LED is lit until the medal insertion (betting) of the next game can be made (after payout) and until the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) is possible when the stored medals are held. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, until the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB stops. Control to turn on the advantageous section display LED.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the special combination is a special combination that carries the winning information to the next game such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, if the special role is valid only for games won such as SB or CB and the special information does not carry the winning information to the next game, it will be selected for the condition device that contains only the small role and replay. As in the case where the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on this, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (betting) becomes possible and until the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

  Further, the advantageous section control means 69 displays the acquired number by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80 to be described later in the game in which the instruction function is operated in the advantageous section. Push order instruction information is displayed on the LED 78. For example, when the small combination B1 is won, the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” in the present embodiment.

The game that can activate the instruction function during the advantageous section is
1) Non-RT and RT1: When winning the small role C group (When winning the small role B group, the pattern function is displayed, so the instruction function is not activated.)
2) RT2: At the time of replay B group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, at the time of small role C group winning 3) RT3: At the time of replay C group winning, at the time of small role B group winning, and at the time of small role C group winning .

  In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission means 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start and end of the advantageous section, the start and end of AT, the operation start and operation end of 1BB, and the like.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. For example, the first control command may be set to data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command may be set to data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. In addition, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, in this embodiment, “00000001 (B)”. Therefore, the two-byte data obtained by combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present) is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (instruction function operation game only), production group number, and accessory condition device number, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is the same as in the above RT. This is data stored in the RWM 53.

  Note that the control command transmission means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. For example, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraud. On the other hand, with respect to the accessory condition device number, there is no fear of the above fraud. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes effect output control means 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control command such as a push order instruction number, an effect group number, and an accessory condition device number. Thus, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) and what effect is output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked or turned off, the speaker 22 And the like, such as what kind of sound is to be output and what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23, etc.).

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games), and the like are displayed as images. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small role B1 in a game in an advantageous section and receiving a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number, the correct left push order “Left first stop” or “1- ○-○” As described above, the contents that the player can easily know the correct pressing order are notified.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the production group number does not include information on which condition device is actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when a control command corresponding to an effect group number indicating that one of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won is received, the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role The sub-control board 80 cannot know which group C has been won. However, it can be known whether the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group is won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying the symbol of “bell” or lighting the frame lamp with “yellow” which is the corresponding color of “bell”.

Then, LED of this embodiment is demonstrated.
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 in more detail.
In FIG. 16, a display substrate 75 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is disposed inside the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and includes a digit 1 that displays an upper digit and a digit 2 that displays a lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7-segment).
As shown in FIG. 16, there are four digits 1 to 4 mounted on the display board 75. In the present embodiment, there are five digits, and the other digit 5 is the main digit. This corresponds to the set value display LED 73 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 50.

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is “00”. In this case, the display is not limited to “00”, but may be “* 0” or “**” (where “*” indicates extinguishing).
Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals are maintained, the medals are bet and not stored. As medals continue to be maintained, medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 43, the maintained medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

  Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) is awarded and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the slot machine 10 has priority over actually paying out a medal from the payout slot. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the stored number before winning a winning combination is “10” and the 9 winning combination wins, the display of the storing number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the winning number of the winning combination exceeds “50”, the portion exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout opening. For example, when the number of reserved coins is “47” before winning a winning combination and nine medals are paid out for winning nine winning combinations, three are stored and the number of storing is “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout slot.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval, etc.”, if the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped on the active line, it is the operation of the condition device related to replay and not “winning” Interpreted. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays an upper digit and a digit 4 that displays a lower digit. Yes. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 76.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is “00” when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when nine medals to be described later win a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is: From “00” to “09”.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying the pressing order instruction information in the instruction function operation game. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquisition number, error contents, and push order instruction information. Note that an advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.
Although not shown in FIG. 16, the digits 1 to 4 are 7-segment displays with dots (DP; decimal point), and the digit 2 (the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76) or the digit 4 (acquired number display LED 78). ) Dots can be used as the advantageous section display LEDs described above.

In FIG. 16, the status display LED 79 is composed of seven LEDs (79a to 79g).
The 1-bet, 2-bet, and 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet, respectively. When one medal is bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit and When one medal is bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. Further, when three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit.

The game start LED 79d is an LED that is lit when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 is operable. Therefore, it does not light up when no medal is bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In this embodiment, even after the replay is activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of stored sheets (for example, when the stored number is less than “50”).

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is lit when a replay is won, and a predetermined timing after the replay wins (for example, before an automatic bet based on a replay win is made or an automatic bet based on a replay win is made) Later, the replay display LED 79f is lit to inform the player that it is in an automatic bet state.
In the present embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is an LED that lights during the settlement process. When the settlement switch 46 is turned on in a state where there is a stored medal and / or a bet medal (excluding an automatic bet at the time of replay winning), the light is lit while the medal is actually paid out.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining details of digits and segments.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (a total of 8), and the segments A to G (7) of them constitute a so-called 7 segment. Further, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 79 (excluding the digit 2).
As shown in FIG. 17, for example, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes a game start LED 79d. Further, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes a closing display LED 79e. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit every interrupt processing. For example, in a certain interrupt process, only digit 1 can be turned on and digits 2 to 5 are turned off. In the next interrupt process, only the digit 2 can be turned on, and the digits 1, 3 to 5 are turned off. Therefore, each digit can be turned on once every five interrupts.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating the input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. 19 and 20 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 3 and 4 to 7 provided on the main control board 60. FIG. Actually, the slot machine 10 is also provided with other input ports and output ports, but they are not directly related to the present embodiment and are not shown.
In this embodiment, the input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 7 are 1-byte ports into which 8 bits D0 to D7 can be input or output. Similarly, other input ports and output ports (not shown) are 1-byte ports that can output 8-bit data of D0 to D7.

  18 to 20, a port indicated as unused means a signal input / output port that is not actually used or a description of which is omitted in the present embodiment (a port without signal input / output). Does not mean all unused).

  In FIG. 18, the input port 0 receives signals of an adjustment switch 46, which is an operation switch, a bet switch 40 (a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b), a start switch 41, and a stop switch 42. In the example of FIG. 18, the 1-bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3-bet switch signal (D2 bit) are separated, but when the slot machine 10 has a specification in which only the 3-bet switch 40 is provided, The D1 bit of input port 0 is unused.

The input port 1 receives signals from the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 15, the setting switch 13, the setting key switch 12, the reset switch 14, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 33.
Furthermore, the input port 2 includes a power interruption signal (a signal output when power interruption occurs), a signal from the closing sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), and a dispensing sensor 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) Signal is input.

  As will be described later, a main process (also referred to as a main loop) that is performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. The main process is a process in which inserted medals are detected or a winning process is performed after all reels 31 are stopped. In addition, a program start process (FIG. 32) and a power supply return process (FIG. 33) described later may be referred to as a main process.

  During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited, and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) described later is executed. In the interrupt process, a process for detecting the input ports 0 to 2 is executed, and after these processes are executed, a process for returning to the main process is performed periodically. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms.

  Based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), rising data of the input port (when the previous interrupt is off, this interrupt is on) Data indicating which bit the data has become), and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is the data that was on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Also, all D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, since the player cannot operate the bet switch 40 while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the D1 and D2 bit data of the input port 0 are always acquired. Although not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits is acquired. If all bits of data are acquired, error determination can be performed. For example, the rise data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
For example, if 1 byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In FIG. 19, at the output port 0, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of this embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and the reel 31 is driven by a combination of four-phase excitations of φ0 to φ3. Are respectively output from predetermined bits.

Further, a signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, when the blocker signal is “1” (on), the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal slot 43 and the hopper 35, and when it is “0” (off), A passage (return passage) that connects the medal slot 43 and the payout slot is formed.
For example, when the blocker 45 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

From the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D4 to D7 bits.
Further, from the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, signals for turning on the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 2-bet display LED 79c in the status display LED 79 are output. Further, the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal are output from the D3 to D7 bits, respectively. These digit signals are signals for turning on / off the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the status display LED 79, and the set value display LED 73.

Further, the segment A signal to the segment P signal are output from the D0 to D7 bits of the output port 3, respectively. These segment signals are signals for lighting each segment (element) shown in FIG.
The digit signal and the segment signal will be specifically described. For example, when the data of the output port 2 is “10000000 (B)”, only the digit 5 is turned on, so only the set value display LED 73 is turned on. Further, when the data of the output port 3 is “00111111 (B)”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on (the signal of the segment G is turned off), and therefore “0” is displayed in the digit 5.
As described above, which digit is lit up at D3 to D7 of the output port 2 and which segment is lit up at the output port 3 are determined.

In FIG. 20, the output port 4 outputs an external (outer end) signal to the external concentration terminal board 100, and in this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output. .
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (a hall computer, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal board 100 as described above. is there. In the present embodiment, an external signal 5 indicating that the door switch 15 of the slot machine 10 is turned on (opening the front door), an external signal 4 indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, External signals 1 to 3 indicating start and end, AT start and end, and 1BB operation start and end are provided. Note that how to determine the external signals 1 to 3 is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to define the external signal 1 as a signal when a specific RT is staying.
Furthermore, a medal bet signal is output from the D6 bit, and a medal payout signal is output from the D7 bit.

The output ports 5 and 6 are ports for outputting sub control data signals (control commands transmitted to the sub control board 80). The output port 5 outputs sub control data signals 1 to 8, and the output port 6 outputs sub control data signals 9 to 16.
The output port 7 is set as a port that transmits a test signal to the testing machine. Here, the “test signal” means that the slot machine 10 connects the slot machine 10 (game machine) and the test machine and transmits a predetermined signal from the slot machine 10 to the test machine. It is a signal used to confirm whether it is designed according to the “Rules for Certification and Type Verification”. The connection between the slot machine 10 and the testing machine is not limited to a direct connection, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

The condition devices 1 to 8 are assigned to the output port 7. Here, the “condition device” indicates a so-called winning number (type of winning), and in this embodiment, D6 and D7 bits indicate whether or not a bonus (special role) is selected, and D0 to D5 bits Indicates the type of winning. By using the D0 to D5 bits, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 7, it is possible to inform the outside which condition device is turned on (which winning) in the game.
The electronic component (IC) for outputting the test signal from the output port 7 is preferably not mounted when the slot machine 10 is installed in the amusement store (market). However, the slot machine 10 is installed in the amusement store in a state where a program for outputting a test signal from the output port 7 is stored in the ROM 54 mounted on the main control board 50. In other words, the slot machine 10 installed in the market is configured such that the program signal for transmitting the test signal is executed, but the test signal by the program process is not output.

FIGS. 21 to 31 are diagrams showing the addresses (storage addresses) of data stored in the RWM 53 and their contents. The data shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 is data used in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these data.
In FIG. 21, the input port level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the address “F008 (H)” is an area for storing the level data of the input port 0. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 0 is read and a predetermined calculation is executed, and then the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) of the address “F009 (H)” is an area for storing the rising data of the input port 0. The calculation is performed every time the input port 0 level data is updated, and the rising data of the input port 0 is also updated.
The “rising” is a signal indicating that the previous interruption time is off (“0”) and the current interruption time is on (“1”). Therefore, when the previous interrupt is on (“1”) and this interrupt is also on (“1”), the rising data is “0”.

In FIG. 22, the input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) of the address “F00A (H)” is an area for storing the input port 1 level data. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 1 is read and a predetermined calculation is executed, and then the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 1 rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) of the address “F00B (H)” is an area for storing the rising data of the input port 1. The calculation is performed every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the rising data of the input port 1 is also updated.

In FIG. 23, input port 1 falling data (_PT_IN1_DOWN) at address “F00C (H)” is an area for storing the falling data of input port 1. The calculation is performed every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 falling data is also updated.
The “falling” is a signal indicating that the previous interruption time is on (“1”) and the current interruption time is off (“0”). Therefore, when the previous interrupt is off (“0”) and the current interrupt is also off (“0”), the falling data is “0”.
The input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F00D (H)” is an area for storing the input port 2 level data. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 2 is read and calculated as described above, and then the data is updated.

In FIG. 24, the specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF) of the address “F00F (H)” is an area for storing data of the specific information flag. Here, in the present embodiment, the specific information flag includes door switch information (D1), setting switch information (D2), setting key switch information (D3), reset switch information (D4), and power-off / return transmission bit (D6). ).
Door switch (15) information (D1), setting switch (13) information (D2), setting key switch (12) information (D3), and reset switch (14) information (D4) Corresponds to the bit. For example, when the door switch 15 is detected to be turned on, the D1 bit of the input port 1 level data is turned on ("1"). At the same time, the D1 bit of the specific information flag is turned on ("1"). ) The same applies to the setting key switch information (D3) and the reset switch information (D4).

  The D6 bit “transmission bit at power recovery” is a flag that is on (“1”) until a predetermined time elapses after detection of recovery from power failure. The specific information flag is in one flag (in one byte data) in order to simultaneously determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the return from power-off and the on / off state of the switch relating to the above-described setting change. In addition, these pieces of information are stored. Therefore, by accessing the specific information flag and determining whether each bit is on or off, it is possible to simultaneously determine whether the switch related to the setting change is on or off and whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the return from power-off. Become.

  The abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML) of the address “F010 (H)” is an area for storing data of the abnormal input flag. In the present embodiment, the D4 to D6 bit data is obtained when an abnormal residence of the passage sensor 43a occurs, when an abnormal input of the input sensor 2 (44b) occurs, and when an abnormal input of the dispensing sensor 37 occurs. Turned on.

  In FIG. 25, the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) of the address “F011 (H)” is an area for mainly storing a flag for controlling on / off of the status display LED 79. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 receiving state, and when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, a state before a bet is placed and a game is started). ) Is set to “1”, and is set to “0” when the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating).

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on, and is “0” when it is off. By determining the value of this D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the current blocker 45 is in (on or off).
The D3-bit replay display LED (79f) is data that is set to “1” when a replay is displayed and a medal is automatically inserted as a replay. When this data is “1”, the replay display LED 79f among the above-described status display LEDs 79 is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the game by re-game is finished. When this data is “0”, the replay display LED 79f is turned off.

  The D4-bit effect display LED (79g) is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated to settle a bet medal and / or a stored medal. When this data is “1”, the effect display LED 79g of the above-described status display LEDs 79 is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the settlement of the medal to be settled is completed.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the replay is not won, and when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where there is a bet medal ("1" or more) and a storage medal ("1" or more) The bet medal is targeted for settlement, and the effect display LED 79g is formed to light up when the bet medal is being settled, but it is formed so that the bet medal and the stored medal are settled at once. If the bet medals are set, the bet medals or the stored medals are preferably set to “1” (the effect display LED 79g is lit). As described above, when a bet medal is obtained by an automatic bet process by replay, the bet medal is not targeted for settlement. In other words, after the replay is won, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where there is a bet medal and there is no stored medal, the medal settlement is not executed.

  The D6 bit setting change disable flag is data that is “0” when the setting can be changed, and is “1” otherwise. In this embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced, and is set to “0” when the medal acceptance of the next game is started. . When the setting is changed, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to. When the setting change disable flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change disable flag is “1”, if it is determined that the error cannot be recovered (for example, random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted and the setting change is not allowed. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

  The D7-bit medal limit setting determination is data that is “1” when the bet medal number has reached the medal limit number (specified number), and “0” when it has not reached the medal limit number. In the present embodiment, the limit number (specified number) is set to 3 during normal games and 2 during 1BB games. Therefore, for example, in a normal game, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the medal limit number is not reached, so it is “0”, and when it is 3, the medal limit number is reached. “1”.

  The bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address “F012 (H)” is an area for storing bet number display LED data, and 1 to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits, respectively. ing. For example, when only the D0 bit is “1”, only the 1-bet display LED 79a is controlled to be lit. When the D1 and D2 bits are “1”, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are controlled to be lit.

In FIG. 26, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F014 (H)” is an area for storing the data of the operation state flag. In this embodiment, the replay is in the D0 bit, and 1BB and D4 are in the D3 bit. RB is assigned to the bit.
For example, when the replay is won, the replay is activated, and when the game state is set (for example, when “Yes” is set in step S91 in FIG. 35 described later), the D0 bit is set to “1”. . The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the game by replay is completed.
When 1BBA or 1BBB wins, the 1BB operation state is set and the RB operation state is set. When the game state is set (for example, step S88 in FIG. 35 described later), the D3 bit and the D4 bit are set. “1”. When the end condition of 1BBA or 1BBB is satisfied, the D3 bit and the D4 bit are “0”.
Although not provided in the present embodiment, when 2BB or CB is provided, for example, assignment to an empty bit of the operation state flag (for example, 2BB is assigned to the D1 bit and CB is assigned to the D2 bit).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address “F015 (H)” is an area for storing the symbol combination display flag. In this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped (when winning), the D0 bit is set to “1”. The bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated.
In addition, although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, and RB (single winning) are provided, for example, DBB is set to 2BB, D2 is set to CB, and D4 is set to correspond to the operation state flag. Allocating RB.

In FIG. 27, the automatic bet (insert) number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) of the address “F06A (H)” is an area for storing automatic insert number data (data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning) In this embodiment, “2” or “3” is stored.
The medal bet (insert) number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address “F06B (H)” is an area for storing medal bet number data, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored. Remembered.
The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F06C (H)” is an area for storing medal payout number data, and in this embodiment, one of the values “0” to “10” is stored. The In this embodiment, since the maximum payout number of medals in one game is 10, the maximum value of the medal payout number data is “10”. However, for example, when a 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

The medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F06D (H)” is an area for storing medal payout number data. Any one of the values “0” to “10” is stored.
In this embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, the values of both the medal payout number data at the address “F06C (H)” and the medal payout number data buffer at the address “F06D (H)” are updated. . At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, the medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” is subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and becomes “0” at the end of the medal payout. On the other hand, the medal payout number data buffer at the address “F06D (H)” is maintained without being updated by medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

  The medal payout number data buffer is provided to determine whether or not a small combination has won during the 1BB game. For example, in a 1BB game, the RB is continuously operated, but it is determined that the RB is terminated by two games or two small roles. At this time, it is necessary to determine whether or not the small role has won when determining the winning of the two small roles that is the RB termination condition. Here, when referring to the medal payout number data at the address “F06C (H)”, even when the small role is won, the payout is completed and “0” may be stored in the address. However, the address “F06D (H)” is provided so that it can be understood that the winning of the small role has occurred regardless of whether or not the payout is completed. In the present embodiment, medal payout number data is stored, but “0” may be stored when the small combination has not won, and “1” may be stored when the small combination has won.

  The acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address “F06E (H)” is an area for storing acquired number data. When the small role is won and the medal is paid out, the payout number is stored in the acquired number data. Based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled. For example, when the acquired number data is “1”, this data “1” is read and “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, the medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” described above stores, for example, “9” when nine winning combinations win, and at the time of medal payout (including addition to the stored number). The counter is decremented according to the number of payouts as “9” → “8” → “7” →... → “0”.
On the other hand, the acquired number data of the address “F06E (H)” is, for example, “1” → “2” → “3” →. It is a counter added in accordance with the medal payout.
Therefore, the display by the acquired number display LED 78 is performed using the acquired number data.

The stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address “F06F (H)” is an area for storing the stored number display data. I remember it.
Here, in the present embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal value (H), but a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed is “29”, the value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F06F (H)”. Thereby, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F06F (H)” are used to display the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are It is stored as data for displaying the upper digit (“2” in this example) of the stored number. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the stored number data itself is not provided, and the stored number display data is provided as display data of the stored number display LED 76. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

  The medal bet (insertion) signal output count (also referred to as medal bet (insertion) signal switching count) (_CT_MEDAL_IN) of address “F070 (H)” is a storage area for the medal bet (insertion) signal output count, and “0” The value of “6” is stored. In this embodiment, the medal bet signal output count indicates the number of times that the bet number of medals is output to the outside as a signal, and the number of times the bet number is doubled is output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the bet number is “3”, so the maximum value of the medal bet signal output count is “6”. For example, when outputting the bet number “3”, “on (first time) → off (second time) → on (third time) → off (fourth time) → on (fifth time) → off (sixth time)”. Become.

  The medal payout signal output count (also referred to as medal payout signal switching count) (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) of address “F071 (H)” is an area for storing data of the medal payout signal output count, and is “0” to “20”. Is stored. This medal payout signal output count indicates the number of times that the medal payout number is output to the outside as a signal, and outputs the number of times the payout number is doubled. This is the same as the above-mentioned medal bet signal output count. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of payouts is “10”, so the maximum value of the number of medal payout signal outputs is “20”. As described above, when the maximum value of the number of payouts is set to “15”, for example, the maximum value of the medal payout signal output count is “30”.

  In FIG. 28, the interrupt counter (_CT_INTR) of addresses “F081 (H)” and “F082 (H)” is an area for storing the interrupt counter. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535 (D)”, and the value is updated (“+1”) for each interrupt. In this embodiment, “0” to “65535 (D)” are adopted as the interrupt counter values, so that the 2-byte address “F081 (H)” (lower 8 bits) and “F082 (H)” ( For example, when the range of “0” to “255 (D)” is adopted, only the 1-byte address “F081 (H)” is used.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address “F083 (H)” is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device number. A value corresponding to the winning and replay condition device is stored. The value stored here is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, selection of an advantageous section, AT lottery (and addition), production group number, and the like.
In this embodiment, a winning device (small role) and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30 (D)” that are condition devices that do not carry the winning information to the next game, and a condition device that can carry the winning information to the next game. The equipment condition device numbers “1” and “2 (D)” are provided. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F083 (H)” is a storage area of the condition device that does not carry the winning information to the next game.

On the other hand, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address “F040 (H)” is an area for storing the accessory condition device number that can carry the winning information, and in this embodiment, the accessory is not selected. “0” is stored for the time, “1” is stored when 1BBA is selected, and “2 (D)” is stored when 1BBB is selected.
Similarly to the above, this value is also used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, selection of advantageous sections, AT lottery (addition), production group number, and the like.
The condition device number described above is also referred to as a winning number.

The push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address “F085 (H)” is an area for storing the push order instruction number. In the present embodiment, a pushing order advantageous to the player is assigned to each winning (winning and replaying) condition device (including both cases of having a pushing order advantageous to the player and not having it). ) When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a push order instruction number corresponding to the selected condition device is acquired and stored at this address.
Note that “when a predetermined condition is satisfied” means a state in which the push order is instructed (in the case of an instruction function operation game). Therefore, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. However, when it is not in the push order instruction state, acquisition of the push order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not executed.

The effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F086 (H)” is an area for storing the effect group number. In this embodiment, when lottery of condition devices is performed, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected and stored at this address.
The left reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the address “F08A (H)” is an area for storing the symbol number passing through the middle stage (see FIG. 3). Thus, every time the symbol number passing through the middle row is updated, the data in this storage area is also updated. For example, when the number 10 “Bell B” in FIG. 2 is located in the middle of the left reel 31, “10 (D)” is stored in this storage area. In addition, the actual symbol number is stored in this storage area after the reel 31 starts rotating (after the reel 31 has reached a constant speed) and after detection by the reel sensor 33. Before the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33, “FF (H)” is stored as an initial value.

  The left reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) of the address “F08B (H)” is an area for storing the symbol number to be stopped in the middle stage. When the stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined from the condition device selected in the game and the position of the reel 31, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle is stored in this storage area. If the symbol number to be stopped is not yet determined, “FF (H)” is stored.

The middle reel symbol number (for passing position) of the address “F08C (H)” and the middle reel symbol number (for stop position) of “F08D (H)” are the addresses “F08A (H) for the left reel 31, respectively. ) "Left reel symbol number (for passing position) and" F08B (H) "corresponding to the left reel symbol number (for stop position) (for middle reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas is the same as the addresses “F08A (H)” and “F08B (H)”, respectively, except that the data is for the middle reel 31.
Also, the right reel symbol number (for passing position) of the address “F08E (H)” and the right reel symbol number (for stop position) of “F08F (H)” are respectively the addresses “F08A” for the left reel 31. (H) ”corresponding to the left reel symbol number (for passing position) and“ F08B (H) ”corresponding to the left reel symbol number (for stopping position) (for the right reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas is the same as the addresses “F08A (H)” and “F08B (H)”, respectively, except that the data is for the right reel 31.

  In FIG. 29, the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) of the address “F091 (H)” is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device information. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F083 (H)” and transmitted to the testing machine. In the winning and replay condition device information, information is generated so that the D6 bit is always “1”, and the D0 to D5 bits are values corresponding to the selected condition device (in this embodiment, “0”). To any one of “30 (D)” are stored. For example, when “00000001 (B)” is stored in the address “F083 (H)” (when Replay A is selected in this embodiment), “01000001 (B)” is stored in the address “F091 (H)”. Will be remembered. In addition, when “00000000 (B)” is stored in the address “F083 (H)” (when the selected condition device number is “0”, that is, when not selected), the address “F091 (H)” is “ “01000000 (B)” is stored.

In addition, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) of the address “F092 (H)” is an area for storing the accessory condition device information. The corresponding number is stored. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on the value of the accessory condition device number of the address “F084 (H)” and transmitted to the testing machine. In this accessory condition apparatus information, information is generated so that the D7 bit is always “1”. Further, when the 1BB is not won, the D0 bit is set to “0”, and when the 1BBA is won or when the 1BBA is in the middle, the D0 bit is set. The bit is set to “1”. For example, when “00000001 (B)” is stored in the address “F084 (H)” (in this embodiment, when 1 BBA is selected), “10000001 (B)” is stored in the address “F092 (H)”. Remembered.
Similarly, when “00000010 (B)” is stored in address “F084 (H)” (when 1 BBB is selected), “10000010 (B)” is stored in address “F092 (H)”. .
Furthermore, when “00000000 (B)” is stored in the address “F084 (H)” (when 1BB is not elected), “10000000 (B)” is stored in the address “F092 (H)”. The
The condition device information described above is also referred to as winning information.

  In FIG. 30, a blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM) of an address “F093 (H)” is an area for storing blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data. The D7 bit is used as the hopper motor drive signal (D0 to D5 bits are not used). When the blocker 45 is turned on, the D6 bit is “1”, and when the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the D7 bit is set to “1”. More specifically, the address “F093 (H)” is updated in the main process, the data of the output port 0 is generated based on the data of the address “F093 (H)” in the interrupt process, and the blocker 45 and the hopper The motor 36 is controlled.

The medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) of the address “F094 (H)” is an area for storing medal signal data, and a medal bet signal is assigned to the D6 bit and a medal payout signal is assigned to the D7 bit. This bit allocation is set to be the same as the allocation bit of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal of the output port 4 (FIG. 20). The medal bet signal is turned on when the medal bet signal is output to the outside. Similarly, the medal payout signal is turned on when the medal payout signal is output (transmitted) to the outside.
In the present embodiment, the medal bet signal is for transmitting bet medal number data (how many bets have been placed and the game has started) to the outside, and does not include stored number data.

  The external signal output flag (_FL_INF_OUT) of the address “F095 (H)” is an area for storing the external signal output flag. When the external signals 1 to 3 are output, the corresponding bits are “1”. Is the data. These external signals 1 to 3 are the same as the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4 (FIG. 20), and the bit assignment of these external signals 1 to 3 is the same as that of the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4. It is set to match the bit assignment.

FIG. 31 shows a storage area for storing a timer value among the storage areas of the RWM 53 of the present embodiment.
The storage area of the timer value of this embodiment has a 1-byte timer storage area and a 2-byte timer storage area. The addresses of all the 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged so as to be continuous. Similarly, the addresses of all the 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged so as to be continuous. Furthermore, the 2-byte timer storage area has a 1-byte storage area for storing the upper digits and a 1-byte storage area for storing the lower digits, and the addresses of these two 1-byte storage areas are consecutive. Yes.

As described above, the 2-byte timer storage area is not arranged between the two 1-byte timer storage areas. Similarly, a 1-byte timer storage area is not arranged between two 2-byte timer storage areas.
Note that, in the address of the 2-byte timer storage area in the present embodiment, the smaller address value indicates the lower digit address, and the address obtained by adding “1” to the lower digit address value indicates the upper digit address. For example, in FIG. 31, of the 2-byte timer of the medal payout device control time, the address “F028 (H)” is the lower digit storage area and the address “F029 (H)” is the upper digit storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the addresses of the storage areas for storing the timer values are arranged consecutively (so as to be serial numbers) from “F021 (H)” to “F02D (H)”. In the first embodiment, the head address “F021 (H)” is the reference address. The meaning of “reference address” will be described later.

In the first embodiment of FIG. 31, the reference address starts from a 1-byte timer storage area, and after seven 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged in succession, three 2-byte timer storage areas continue. Has been placed.
Further, all the timer values shown in FIG. 31 are subtracted (updated) at the time of timer measurement of interrupt processing described later. That is, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, in FIG. 54 to be described later, even when the interrupt process is executed, when the power interruption is detected in step S603, the timer measurement in step S605 does not proceed, so that the timer value is always set during the interrupt process. “1” is not necessarily subtracted (updated). Therefore, in this specification, each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is described as “subtract”, but actually it means “to be subtractable”, and in any case, always “subtract”. It doesn't mean that.
As described above, by continuously arranging storage areas for storing timer values, it is possible to sequentially update all timer values in a simple manner by timer measurement (FIG. 55) described later.

In addition, in the MPU (1-chip microprocessor) instruction of this embodiment, subtraction processing can be performed with one instruction even with a 2-byte timer. The 2-byte timer subtraction process is programmed as follows.
“0100 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00FF (H)”
“0001 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
Similarly, the 1-byte timer
"10 (H)"->"1"subtraction->"0F(H)"
“01 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
“00 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
It becomes.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to the subtraction process, it is “0000 (H)” (in the case of 2 bytes) or “00 (H)” (in the case of 1 byte).
Here, it is determined whether the value stored in the address to be subtracted is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”, and is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”. In some cases, the program may be such that the subtraction process is not executed. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)” and to determine whether or not to perform subtraction processing according to the determination result. .
On the other hand, when a carry occurs (as in this embodiment), if the value is “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)”, the value before the calculation is “0000 (H)”. Alternatively, the timer value can be updated by the same subtraction process regardless of whether it is “00 (H)”, so that the program capacity can be simplified.

  In FIG. 31, an external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) of an address “F021 (H)” is a storage area of a timer value for measuring the output time of a medal bet signal and a medal payout signal. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has reached “0”, the timer value “46 (D)” (“2E (H)” in hexadecimal) is set again (step S742 in FIG. 58). , A count to subtract “1” for each interrupt is executed.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the external signal output time is set to “46 (D)”, and the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal are values obtained by doubling the actual bet number and the payout number.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of the external signal output time is “92 (D)” that is twice “46 (D)”, and when this timer value is “92 to 47 (D)”. An ON signal can be output, and an OFF signal can be output when the timer value is “46 to 1 (D)”.
In this case, in FIG. 27, both the medal bet signal output count of the address “F070 (H)” and the medal payout signal output count of the address “F071 (H)” need to store values doubled. Instead, it is only necessary to store the number of bets and the number of payouts. Accordingly, in this case, “0 to 3 (D)” is stored as the number of medal bet signal outputs at the address “F070 (H)”, and the medal payout signal output number at the address “F071 (H)”. , “0-10 (D)” is stored.

For example, in a situation where “3” is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address “F070 (H)”, when the timer value is “92 to 47 (D)”, an ON signal is output and the timer value is When “46 to 1 (D)”, control is performed to output an off signal. When the timer value becomes “0”, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal bet signal output count (in this example, a process of updating from “3 (D)” to “2 (D)”), The process of resetting the timer value “92 (D)” is executed.
By repeating such processing until the medal bet signal output count becomes “0”, when “3 (D)” is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address “F070 (H)”, the medal A process of outputting an ON signal as a bet signal and a process of outputting an OFF signal are executed three times. In addition, in a situation where “0” is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address “F070 (H)”, a count process (timer value “92˜ Although processing for circulating 0 (D) "is performed, control is performed so that an off signal is output regardless of the timer value.
In the above description, the medal bet signal is described as an example, but the ON signal output and the OFF signal output of the medal payout signal are performed in the same manner (the data of the address “F071 (H)” and the address “F021 ( H) "based on the timer value).

  The reel stop reception waiting time (_TM1_STOP) of the address “F022 (H)” is a storage area for a timer value for measuring the waiting time until the next stop switch 42 is operated after the stop switch 42 is operated. . When the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the timer value “7 (D)” (“7 (H)” in hexadecimal) is set (step S326 in FIG. 51), and “1” is set for each interrupt. Execute the count to subtract.

The payout sensor check time (_TM1_PAY) of the address “F023 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for monitoring the payout detection after the hopper motor 36 stops driving and a timer value for detecting a clogged medal. is there. In the present embodiment, a timer value “46 (D)” (“2E (H)” in hexadecimal) is set as a detection time when a predetermined timing is reached in a single medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) described later. , A count to subtract “1” for each interrupt is executed.
Specifically, first, when a signal from the payout sensor 1 is detected, a timer value “46 (D)” is set as the payout sensor 1 detection time (step S259 in FIG. 46), and the timer value is “0”. "When the signal of the payout sensor 1 is on, etc., it is determined that the token is jammed.

Second, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the timer value “46 (D)” is set as the detection time of the payout sensor 1 (step S261 in FIG. 46), and the timer value becomes “0”. If the signal of the payout sensor 1 does not turn on even when the medals are determined, it is determined that a medal empty error (hopper empty).
Third, when the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on and then the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are turned on, the timer value “46 (D)” is set as the payout sensor 2 detection time (FIG. 46, step S268). If the signal of the payout sensor 2 does not turn off even when the timer value becomes “0”, it is determined that the token is jammed.

The condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address “F024 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and accessory condition device information). is there. In this embodiment, “25 (D)” (“19 (H)” in hexadecimal) is set after the minimum game time has elapsed (step S316 in FIG. 50), and “1” is subtracted by 1 for each interrupt. The
In this embodiment, about 53.64 ms is counted by 24 interrupts, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the timer value “25 (D)” is set after the lapse of the minimum game time, the timer value is “24 (D)” (hexadecimal “ 18 (H) "). And while the timer value is “24 (D) to 13 (D)” (hexadecimal, “18 (H) to D (H)”), the accessory condition device information is output, and the timer value is While it is “12 (D) to 1 (D)” (in hexadecimal, “C (H) to 1 (H)”), the winning and replay condition device information is output. Further, while the timer value is “0”, the value “0” is output as the condition device information.

  The external signal 4 output time (_TM1_POWER_ON) at the time of power failure recovery at the address “F025 (H)” is a timer value storage area for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 (D1 bit of the output port 4) at the time of power failure recovery. is there. In the present embodiment, when a return from power-off is detected, “136 (D)” (hexadecimal “88 (H)”) is set as the initial value of this value (step S39 in FIG. 33), and one interrupt is issued. Every time, “1” is subtracted. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is output until this value becomes “0”.

  The blocker-off monitoring time (_TM1_BLOFF_CHK) of the address “F026 (H)” is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (step S702 in FIG. 56), and stores a timer value for standby when the blocker 45 is turned off. It is an area to do. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, “144 (D)” (“90 (H)” in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, the blocker 45 is not turned off from on. As described above, the blocker 45 is not turned off from on-off for a certain period of time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, so that the medal is prevented from being caught between the medal selector and the blocker 45 (as a result, a medal retention error or the like). Is to prevent).

  The blocker ON monitoring time (_TM1_BLON_CHK) of the address “F027 (H)” is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (step S703 in FIG. 56), and stores a timer value for standby when the blocker 45 is turned on from off. It is an area to do. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, “45 (D)” (“2D (H)” in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted by one for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, the blocker 45 is not turned on from off. As described above, the reason why the blocker 45 is not turned on for a predetermined time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal is to prevent the medal from being caught between the medal selector and the blocker 45 as described above. is there.

Furthermore, there is a difference between the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned off from “on” (“145” interrupt) and the waiting time when the blocker 45 is turned on from “off” (“46” interrupt). This is because the time required to turn off is longer than the time required for the blocker 45 to turn on from off.
Although not illustrated in the present embodiment, when the blocker 45 is turned on from off, it is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is turned off from on, it is due to an action of releasing with a spring. As described above, this is based on the difference between the time for turning on from off and the time for turning off from on due to the difference in power used.

The medal payout device control time (_TM2_HE_CHK) of the addresses “F028 (H)” and “F029 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the control time of the medal payout device, that is, the hopper motor 36. When the driving of the hopper motor 36 is started, an initial value is set to count the number of interruptions “2686” (step S255 in FIG. 46). Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, “2686 (D)” (“0A7E (H)” in hexadecimal) is set, or “FF (H)” is set to “0A7E (H)”. The added “0B7D (H)” is set. The method for determining whether or not the number of interrupts “2686” has been counted differs depending on which value is set. This point will be described later.
When the initial value “0A7E (H)” is set, when the timer value is “0”, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value “0B7D (H)” is set, when the timer value is “00FF (H)” or less, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

The game standby display start time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) of the addresses “F02A (H)” and “F02B (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the standby time until the game standby display is performed. In the game start set (MS_GAME_SET), an initial value is set in order to count the number of interruptions “26846” (step S81 in FIG. 35). Note that the game standby display start time of the present embodiment is set to “about 60 seconds” (26846 × 2.235 ms≈60 seconds).
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, “26846 (D)” (“68DE (H)” in hexadecimal) is set, or “68DE (H)” is set to “FF (H) in the same manner as described above. ) ”Is added and“ 69DD (H) ”is set. Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
When the initial value “68DE (H)”) is set, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed when the timer value is “0”.
On the other hand, when the initial value “69DD (H)” is set, when the timer value is “00FF (H)” or less, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of addresses “F02C (H)” and “F02D (H)” is a timer for monitoring one minimum game time, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the number of interrupts To count “1836”, an initial value is set (step S312 in FIG. 50). Note that the minimum game time of the present embodiment is set to “about 4.1 seconds” (2.235 ms × 1836≈4100 ms).
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, “1836 (D)” (“072C (H)” in hexadecimal) is set, or “FF (H)” is added to “072C (H)”. “082B (H)” is set. Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
When the initial value “072C (H)”) is set, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed when the timer value is “0”.
On the other hand, when the initial value “082B (H)” is set, when the timer value is “00FF (H)” or less, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed.

  The timer shown in FIG. 31 is a count value stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, and the game can proceed even after the predetermined value is set. This is different from the 2-byte time waiting process (FIG. 39) described later. In the 2-byte wait process, an interrupt wait process (FIG. 40) is executed, and during this time, the progress of the game is in a wait (wait process) state.

Next, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process (M_PRG_START) when starting a program by the main control board 50.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 50 initializes the register in the next step S12. Specific processing includes, for example, processing for storing the upper address of the RWM 53 (F0 (H) in this embodiment) in the Q register. With this processing, for example, when specifying the address of the RWM 53, only the lower address (for example, “21 (H)” when the address “F021 (H)” is specified) is specified by the Q register. By combining with the data (F0 (H)), it becomes possible to designate the address “F021 (H)” of the RWM 53, leading to a reduction in the program capacity.

  Next, proceeding to step S13, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off process completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, the power-off process completion flag is stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 when the power is turned off (step S619 in FIG. 54). This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. In step S13, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (in this embodiment, “01 (H)”), the process proceeds to step S14, and the normal value (in this embodiment, “ If it is determined that “other than 01 (H)”, the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating the checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, checksum calculation (addition of data value of target address) in the same range (for example, work area, unused area, and stack area used in the program) as the checksum of RWM 53 executed at the time of power-off processing Execute.
In this embodiment, checksum data of the RWM 53 is set so that the checksum of a predetermined range of the RWM 53 is performed and the data becomes “0” by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 that calculated the current checksum, and it is determined whether or not the next address is an address for calculating the checksum. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
In the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the specified RWM 53 in this embodiment.

  In step S16, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 53 is a normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S13), and / or the checksum data of the RWM 53 is an abnormal value (the entire range check calculated in step S14). When it is determined that the sum data value is not “0”), an abnormal value is stored as the power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S17, the level data of the input port 1 (FIG. 18) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S18, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the input port 1. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” refers to two signals of the input port 1, that is, the signal (D 1) of the door switch 15 and the signal (D 3) of the setting key switch 12.

Only when the signal of the door switch 15 is ON (the front cover (housing) is opened) and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is ON (when the setting key is inserted). Allow setting changes. When all the two designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S22. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to move to the setting change process in step S22. .
That is, when the signal of the door switch 15 is off (when the front cover is closed), the signal of the setting key switch 12 cannot be turned on, and the possibility of fraud is high. Do not allow transition to processing.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 while holding that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (the data stored in step S16). If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change impossibility flag is the D6 bit value of the above-described medal management flag (FIG. 25). In FIG. 34, the period from the lottery process (step S60) to the game end check process (step S69) is performed. This flag is disabled. If the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21. If the setting change disable flag is not on, the setting change process in step S22 is performed while holding that the power-off recovery data is a normal value (the data stored in step S16). move on. As described above, the present embodiment includes the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value and the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is a normal value.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossibility flag is provided. However, when the setting change is always possible, the setting change impossibility flag may not be provided. In this case, the processing corresponding to steps S19 and S20 is not necessary, and the process proceeds to the setting change processing in step S22 regardless of whether or not the power-off recovery is abnormal.

  In step S21, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register in step S16. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform a power recovery process (FIG. 33). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24, and an unrecoverable error process is performed. The error when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an “E1” error in this embodiment, and “E1” is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78). To do. The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Specifically, it can be canceled by clearing a predetermined range of the RWM 53 (in this embodiment, F000 (H) to F1FF (H)) by RWM clear in the setting change process.

As described above, in the program start process, if the setting change can be performed in both cases where the power-off recovery data is a normal value and an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process.
Further, when the designated switch is not on (“No” in step S18) or when the setting cannot be changed and the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (“No” in step S21), the unrecoverable error processing is performed. When the power-off recovery data is a normal value (“Yes” in step S21), the process proceeds to the power-recovery process (FIG. 33).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S23 in FIG.
First, in step S31, the stack pointer is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an RWM 53 area (stack) that stores data (for example, a register value, a program address of an instruction process of a main process before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption when a power interruption occurs. This is referred to as an area, and in this embodiment, it is one of the registers (also referred to as SP registers) indicating to which area (address) of F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H) has been stored. Specifically, the stack pointer value is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 in the power-off process in step S619, and the value stored in the address is stored in the stack pointer in step S31.
In the next step S32, the setting value stored in the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the setting value is a normal range (“1” to “6”). When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S33. When it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S42, and the process proceeds to an unrecoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78).

In step S33, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. In the next step S34, initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S33 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value is stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, there is a possibility that it may lead to fraud etc. Therefore, the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). Yes.
In the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S36. In step S36, data of the input ports 0 to 2 (FIGS. 21 to 23) is set, and in the next step S37, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.

In step S38, specific information data at the time of power-on is set. This process is a process of setting the D6 bit (transmission bit at power failure return) of the specific information flag (FIG. 24) to “1”. In the next step S39, the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery is set. In this process, “136 (D)” is set as the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery at the address “F025 (H)” in FIG. As a result, this value is subtracted for each interrupt.
In the next step S40, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interrupt cycle, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 54) is executed after the process.
In step S41, the power-off process completion flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. After the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process returns to the step immediately before the power is turned off during the main process in FIG.

In the power recovery process described above, the interrupt process is started (step S40) after the input ports 0 to 2 are read (step S37). The reason is as follows.
As will be described later, a setting key can be inserted to check the set value while waiting for a game. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the setting value is completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during setting confirmation, and the power is turned on by turning off the setting key switch 12 (with the setting key removed) during the power interruption.

In this case, the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power supply is restored, so that the falling of the setting key switch is detected. The
As a result, the state at the time of power-off recovery is different from the state before the power-off. Specifically, the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 is “0” in the state before the power is turned off, whereas the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 is “1” when the power is restored.
Therefore, in order to avoid different states before and after the power is turned off, the values of the RWM 53 of the input ports 0 to 2 are updated to the latest state when the power is restored. After executing the read process, the interrupt process is activated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. During this main process, an interrupt process (FIG. 54) described later is performed every 2.235 ms.
35 to 53 are processes showing a subroutine during the main process.

In FIG. 34, in step S51, a stack pointer is set. Specifically, it is a process of setting “F200 (H)” as an initial value as a stack pointer. For example, when “F200 (H)” is designated as the stack pointer, the address at which information such as a register is stored in the stack area is the stack area (F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)). “F1FF (H)”.
In the next step S52, game start set processing (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S52, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 35 mentioned later.

In the next step S53, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time (unlike reading of the stored number).
In the next step S54, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S53.

  If it is determined in step S54 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S56. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S55 to wait for a medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP; FIG. 42), and the process proceeds to step S56. The medal insertion waiting process is a process of detecting a setting key switch signal and determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed.

In step S56, medal management processing (MS_MEDAL_CHK; FIG. 43) is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not a medal has been inserted and whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated.
In the next step S57, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535 (D). As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before update may be executed.

In the next step S58, the main control board 50 performs a start switch check process (M_START_CHK; FIG. 48). This process is a process for determining whether or not the start switch 41 is operated. In the start switch check in step S58, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S59, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.
In step S59, start switch acceptance processing (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) is performed. In this process, various flags are set, the medal bet signal output count is set, and the like.

  Next, proceeding to step S60, the main control board 50 (the role lottery means 61) performs lottery of the role (condition device). Here, at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received, the winning combination lottery is executed. That is, the random number value at the time of the lottery drawing is acquired by receiving the start switch in step S59. In step S60, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random value corresponding to any of the condition devices using a lottery table. The condition device number won here is stored in the winning and replay condition device number or the accessory condition device number in FIG. 28 described above.

In the next step S61, the main control board 50 (push order instruction number selection means 63) executes a push order instruction number setting process. This process is a process of selecting a push order instruction number in a game that displays push order instruction information (instruction function operation game) according to the selected condition device and storing it in the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 in FIG. I do. By this processing, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Next, proceeding to step S62, the main control board 50 (effect group number selection means 64) executes effect group number setting processing. In this process, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the selected number is stored in the effect group number of the RWM 53 in FIG. 28, or the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. This is a process of storing the production group number in the control command buffer.

In the next step S63, a reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY; FIG. 50) is executed. In this process, a determination as to whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, a process of storing condition device information corresponding to the selected condition device number, and the like are executed.
In step S64, the reel control means 65 starts to rotate the reel 31. In the next step S65, the main control board 50 performs stop control (M_REEL_STOP; FIG. 51) of the reel 31. This process is a process for controlling the stop of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.

If it is determined in step S65 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S66.
In step S66, first, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line. Then, the symbol combination flag in FIG. 26 is updated in accordance with the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.

In step S66, secondly, the value of the medal payout number data in FIG. 27 is updated. For example, when one winning combination wins and the medal payout number data until that time is “0”, “0” is updated to “1”. Further, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal payout number data buffer is updated in the same manner.
In step S67, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S72. When it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and when the process proceeds to step S72, it cannot be restored. Perform error handling. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an “E5” error, displays “E5” in digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78), and stops the main process.

In the next step S68, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY; FIG. 52) corresponding to the winning combination. This processing includes actual medal payout processing, processing for setting the number of payout signal outputs, and the like. In the next step S69, the main control board 50 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK; FIG. 53). This process is a process of clearing various flags.
In the next step S70, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended. Specifically, “3F (H)” is stored in the D register and “FF (H)” is stored in the E register.

In step S71, the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET; FIG. 36). This process is a process of storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a control command buffer (not shown) provided in the RWM 53.
And when the process of step S71 is complete | finished, it returns to step S50 again.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52 of FIG.
First, in step S81, a game standby display start time is set. This process is a process of setting “26846 (D)” or “27101 (D)” to the game standby display start time of the address “F02A (H)” in FIG. Here, when the game standby display start time is set, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt process from this point.

  When the game standby display start time becomes “0”, the acquired number data (address “F06E (H)” in FIG. 27) is cleared in step S162 while waiting for the medal insertion in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “9” and the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 46 and ends the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.

The acquired number display LED 78 after the game standby display start time elapses is not limited to “00” but may be “* 0” or “**”. Here, “*” indicates light extinction.
When “* 0” is displayed, the LED display request flag (described later) of the digit 3 is set to “0” when the game standby display start time is “0”. As a result, even when the interrupt processing is when the digit 3 is lit, the segments A to G of the digit 3 are controlled not to be lit.
Similarly, when “**” is displayed, the LED display request flag of the digits 3 and 4 is set to “0” when the game standby display start time is “0”. As a result, even when the interrupt processing is performed when the digit 3 or the digit 4 is turned on, the control is performed so that the segments A to G of the digit 3 or the digit 4 are not turned on.

In step S82, the push order instruction number is initialized. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the address “F085 (H)” in FIG.
In the next step S83, the symbol combination display flag data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination on the active line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag (“F015 (H)” in FIG. 26) in the A register.
In the next step S84, it is determined whether or not a 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit stored in the A register value is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined “Yes”, and if it is “0”, “No” is determined. " When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S85, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S86.

  In step S85, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process stores (stores) a predetermined value, for example, “150” (FIG. 10) in the case of 1 BBA, in an area (not shown) for storing the number of obtainable 1BB games provided in the RWM 53. It is processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S86.

In the next step S86, an operating state flag is generated. In step S86, the following processes (1) to (5) are executed.
(1) Store the address of the operation state flag in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 26, since the address of the operation state flag is “F014 (H)”, the H register value = “F0 (H)” and the L register value = “14 (H)”.
(2) Next, an OR operation is performed on the A register value and the information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (in other words, the address specified by the HL register value, the same applies hereinafter), and the operation result is expressed as A. Store in register. Here, in the A register, the data of the symbol combination display flag is stored in step S83, and the information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is information on the operating state flag.

Specifically, it is as follows, for example.
Example 1)
When a 1BB symbol combination is displayed,
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information stored at the address indicated by the HL register value: 00000000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
It becomes.
Example 2)
When 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and 1BB and RB are active,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored at the address indicated by the HL register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00011000 (B)
It becomes.

Example 3)
When 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and 1BB is active but RB is not active,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored at the address indicated by the HL register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
It becomes.

(3) Store the A register value in the C register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)

(4) An AND operation is performed on the information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”: 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”: 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)

(5) Rotate shift the A register value to the left and store the operation result in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
A register value (before operation): 00001000 (B)
A register value (after operation): 00010000 (B)

In the next step S87, the operating state flag is updated. In this process, the A register value and the C register value are ORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)

In the next step S88, the operating state flag is saved (stored). In this process, the value stored in the A register is stored in the address of the RWM 53 indicated by the HL register value (that is, the operating state flag). Thereby, the information on the operation state flag updated so far is replaced with the information on the operation state flag updated in step S87.
For example, as in Example 1), when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is changed from “0” to “1”.
Further, as in Example 2, when 1BB and RB are in operation, the states are maintained (the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operation state flag are “1”).

  Furthermore, as in Example 3), when 1BB is operating, but RB is not operating, the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operating state flag is changed from “0” to “1”. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of two games (or at the time of two winnings), but when the end condition for the 1BB game is not satisfied (operation state) When the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the flag is “1”), it is set to “1” in this step S88.

In the next step S89, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In this process, the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register are XORed, the calculation result is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not the zero flag is “1”. .
Taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 100000000 (B) (zero flag ≠ 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 00000000 (B) (zero flag = 1)

When the zero flag is “1”, the determination is “No” and the process proceeds to step S91. When the zero flag is not “1”, the determination is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S90. As described above, in step S89,
a) At the start of 1BB game b) After the RB operation is finished, if the end condition of 1BB game is not satisfied, it is judged as “Yes”.
In the next step S90, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. In this process, “2” is stored (stored) in the storage area (not shown) of the game number counter during RB operation provided in the RWM 53, and the storage area (not shown) of the winning number counter during RB operation. ) Is a process of saving (storing) “2”. Then, the process proceeds to step S91.

  It should be noted that both the game number counter during RB operation and the winning number counter during RB operation are both set to “2” as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by “1”, “1” is set. The counter is decremented by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, and is incremented by “1” every time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, and these counter values are “2”. It may be determined whether or not it has been reached.

  In step S91, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S83, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of replay is displayed (whether the replay has won a prize). When it is determined that the combination of symbols for replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S92, and when it is determined that the combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S94.

  In step S92, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game (the address “F06B (H)” in FIG. 27). In step S93, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of updating the automatic bet number data of the address “F06A (H)” in FIG. 27 (for example, “3 (D)” is stored in the normal game).

  Next, the process proceeds to step S94, and the output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S95, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, a control command for transmitting information indicating that the replay is activated or 1BB is activated to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the control command buffer. Although not shown, a control command is stored in the control command buffer in order to transmit information regarding the set value of the current game, information regarding the RT of the current game, and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S96, and the process proceeds to a medal acceptance start process (MS_MEDAL_START; FIG. 38).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the processing of the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S71 in FIG. 34, for example. Specifically, this process is a process executed when a control command for transmission is stored in the control command buffer in the main process. In other words, when a control command for transmission is stored in the control command buffer by interrupt processing, the control command set 1 is not executed, and a control command set 2 described later is directly executed.

First, in step S501, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. In the next step S502, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET; FIG. 37) is executed. In step S503, the interrupt processing prohibited in step S501 is canceled (that is, interrupt permission) is executed. Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2.
In the control command set 2, the control command is written as shown below. While the control command set 2 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the prohibition / release of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms from when the interrupt process is disabled) comes after the interrupt process is disabled in step S501. The main CPU 55 then clears the interrupt flag when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing.
When the timing for executing the interrupt process arrives, the main control board 50 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether the interrupt process is prohibited / permitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) in step S502 of FIG. As described above, when one control command is stored in the control command buffer by interrupt processing, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is not executed. Further, when executing the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET), information constituting one control command is stored in the D register and the E register.
First, in step S511, an address (not shown) of a control command buffer is set. This process is a process for storing the head address of the control command buffer in the HL register. Although not shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 described above, the RWM 53 is provided with a plurality of storage areas for storing control command buffers.
In the next step S512, a control command write pointer value is acquired. The control command write pointer is for designating which address of the RWM 53 the control command data is to be written. Since the current write pointer is stored at a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53, Processing to read the write pointer is performed.
In this process, the control command write pointer value is stored in the A register value. For example, when the value stored in the control command write pointer value is “1”, the A register value = “1”.

In the next step S513, a designated address is acquired. In this process, the write address (in RWM 53) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and the data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Next, proceeding to step S514, data at a specified address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 at the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.

In “control command <64?” In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the designated address data (the A register value stored in step S514) is “0”. , “Yes”.
Here, “No” is determined in step S515 when the A register value is not “0”. When the A register value is not “0”, it means that data has already been written to the control command buffer at the address indicated by the control command write pointer value, and data cannot be written to the address. In this way, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
When “Yes” is determined in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516, and when “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the “store control command in RWM” in the next step S516, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. Then, the E register value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored at the address indicated by the “HL + 1” register value.
As a result, the E register value and the D register value can be stored in the addresses (control command buffers) of two consecutive RWMs 53.

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this process, first, a control command write pointer value stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is stored in the HL register.
Next, “1” is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, when “64 (D)” is exceeded as a result of adding “1”, “0” is set.
Then, the value after addition (the value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S96 of FIG.
First, in step S101, the bet medal number data is cleared. That is, it is a process of clearing the bet number in the previous game, and specifically, a process of setting the value of the medal bet number data of the address “F06B (H)” to “0” in FIG.
In step S102, the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) are turned off. Specifically, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to set the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED signal data of the address “F012 (H)” to “0”. Note that the bet number of the previous game may be displayed by the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) without executing step S102. Thereby, it becomes possible to confirm how many medals were bet and played in the previous game. The display of the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) may be updated for the first time when a medal for the game is actually bet.
In the next step S103, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to set the D0, D2-D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag of the address “F011 (H)” to “0”.

  In the next step S104, the main control board 50 checks the operating state flag. Here, the operation state flag is checked in order to determine whether or not the replay operation is being performed in the next step S105. In this embodiment, in step S104, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operating state flag (FIG. 26) is read.

Next, the process proceeds to step S105, and based on the reading in step S104, it is determined whether or not the replay operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is “1”. When the D0 bit is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S106, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S118.
If it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed and the process proceeds to step S118, a process of turning on the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 41) is executed, and the process of this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the replay is not operated, the medal maintenance is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start process of this flowchart, the process after step S106 corresponds to the automatic bet process at the time of the replay operation.

  In step S106, a standby time during replay operation is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 500 ms as the wait time, a count value “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. For this reason, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “11101101 (B)” is set as the C register value. That is, in order to execute the 2-byte time waiting process in step S108, the upper byte value of the waiting time is stored in the B register, and the lower byte value is stored in the C register.

In step S108, a 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT; FIG. 39) is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”. This standby process is provided in order to prevent the replay display LED 79f from being lit immediately after the end of the game (step S111) or being automatically bet immediately after the end of the game (step S114). Because this is not preferred). Thereby, the timing of automatic betting can be made appropriate.
Further, for example, at the time of replay winning, it is possible to provide the player with a replay winning effect (including sound effects at the time of replay winning) using a 2-byte waiting time process (2-byte waiting time process). During the game, it waits for the progress of the game (the wait process is executed), so the production cannot be canceled).
Further, the betting sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the commands stored in step S112 and step S113.

  When the 2-byte waiting process ends, the process proceeds to step S108, and the stored number is read. Here, as described above, the stored number data is obtained by reading the stored number display data at the address “F06F (H)” in FIG. In the next step S109, it is determined whether or not the stored number is the limit number (in this embodiment, 50). When it is determined that the number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S111. When it is determined that the number is not the limit number, the process proceeds to step S110.

In step S110, control is performed so that the blocker is turned on, that is, acceptance of medals is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S111.
As described above, first, when it is not during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is always turned on to accept the medal. This is because when the replay operation is not in progress, even if the number of stored games was the upper limit (50) in the previous game, the bet medals (3 in the normal game) are consumed, and that amount can be bet. .

Second, at the time of the replay operation, if the number of stored medals is not the limit number, the blocker 45 is turned on to accept the medal. This is because when the number of stored medals is not the limit number, at least the number of stored medals can be added by caring for medals.
Thirdly, at the time of the replay operation, if the number of stored medals is the limit number, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the blocker 45 is kept off until then). This is because when the replay operation is performed and the number of stored medals is the upper limit number, medals cannot be betted and the number of stored medals cannot be added, so that no medals are accepted.

In step S111, a replay display LED lighting process is performed. This process is a process of turning on (“1”) the D3 bit of the medal management flag (FIG. 25).
The process of actually turning on the replay display LED 79f is performed by the LED display control in step S606 in an interrupt process (FIG. 54) described later.
Thus, since the lighting process of the replay display LED 79f is executed after the execution of the 2-byte waiting process in step S107, the replay display LED 79f is not lit at the moment when the replay is displayed, but after the replay is displayed, It will light up after about 0.5 seconds.

In the next step S112, an output request set process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made is performed on the sub-control board 80, and a control command set 1 process is executed in the next step S113. .
In the next step S114, a process for adding one medal (in this case, means an automatic bet process), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals one by one in order to place an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Process. Note that, based on the addition of one medal in step S114, the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED signal data at the address “F012 (H)” in FIG. 25 are updated. Thereby, the lighting state of the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c is updated by an interrupt process described later.

Next, proceeding to step S115, a standby time for automatic betting based on replay is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. For this reason, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value. In step S116, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”, as described above. When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S116 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117, where it is determined whether or not the medal limit number (three in normal game) has been reached. The process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal limit number is not reached, the process returns to step S114, and one medal addition (automatic betting) process is executed again.

  As described above, in the automatic bet at the time of replay winning, the two-byte waiting process in steps S115 and S116 is executed in accordance with the automatic betting of medals one by one. This is executed every time about 100 ms elapses. Thereby, the bet number display LED signal data is also updated every time about 100 ms elapses. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are sequentially turned on (approximately every 100 ms). Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, when an automatic bet sound (sound such as “pull”) is output from the speaker 22, the change in lighting of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c and the automatic bet sound can be synchronized. In the case where the processes of steps S115 and S116 are not performed, it is possible to show the player that all the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c are turned on all at once.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT).
First, in step S521, it is determined whether a 2-byte standby time has elapsed. This process determines the value of the BC register and determines whether it is “0” (whether the B register value is “0” and the C register value is “0”). Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, it is determined that the value is not “0”. Alternatively, when the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined as “0”.
When it is determined in step S521 that it is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S522.

  In step S522, an interrupt wait process (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 40) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S523, the waiting time update process is executed, and the process returns to step S521. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “255 (D)”. It becomes. Alternatively, for example, when B register value = “0” and C register value = “1”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “0”.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT).
First, in obtaining the interrupt counter value in step S531, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. In this embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits (2-byte counter) in two addresses “F081 (H)” and “F082 (H)” in FIG. The value stored in the lower 8-bit address “F081 (H)” is stored in the A register.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S532, and it is determined whether or not the interrupt counter value (the value of the lower 8 bits stored in the address “F081 (H)”) has changed in FIG. Specifically, when the interrupt counter value stored in the address “F081 (H)” is subtracted from the A register value and the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”) , “No” is determined. Then, when it is determined that there is a change, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that there is no change, the process of step S532 is continued.

  Further, as described above, when an 8-bit value (1-byte counter) is used as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address “F081 (H)”, so in step S531, the address “F081 (H ) "Is stored in the A register, and in step S532, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the address" F081 (H) "has changed.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON) in step S110 of FIG.
First, in step S131, the main control board 50 checks the elapse of the monitoring time when the blocker is on. Here, the monitoring time when the blocker is on at the address “F027 (H)” in FIG. 31 is read. As for the monitoring time when the blocker is on, a timer value “45” is set when the passage sensor 43a is turned on (when a medal is detected), and this timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, in the next step S132, it is determined whether or not the monitoring time at blocker on has elapsed. Here, in FIG. 31, when the timer value of the address “F027 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the monitoring time at the blocker ON has elapsed, and when it is not “0”, the monitoring time at the blocker ON has elapsed. Judge that there is no.

When it is determined that the monitoring time when the blocker is on has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S133, and when it is determined that the period has not elapsed, the process returns to step S131, and a process of waiting until the monitoring time has elapsed is performed.
The reason for controlling in this way is to prevent the medal from being caught by the blocker 45. Specifically, if approximately 100 ms has elapsed since the medal was detected by the passage sensor 43a, the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a has already passed the blocker 45 (the medal passes through the medal return passage). This is because it can be determined. In other words, if the blocker 45 is driven within about 100 ms after the passage sensor 43a is turned on, the blocker 45 may pinch a medal detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  In step S133, the main control board 50 prohibits interruption from this point. As described above, during the execution of the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed once every 2.235 ms. However, after the “interrupt disabled” process in step S133 is executed, the interrupt disabled is released. Until no interrupt is permitted.

In the next step S134, the main control board 50 performs processing for turning on the blocker signal. This process is a process of storing data for setting the D6 bit signal of the output port 0 to “1”. Specifically, this is a process of setting the D6 bit (blocker signal) to “1” in the “blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data” in FIG.
In this embodiment, information is output from the output port by interrupt processing (step S611 in FIG. 54 described later). That is, instead of turning on the D6 bit of the output port 0 at the timing of step S134, the blocker signal “1” is stored in the “blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data” in step S134, which is the main process, and an interrupt occurs. During the process of outputting the output port 0 in the process (step S611), the output is based on the data stored in the RWM 53.

  In the next step S135, the flag of the blocker state is turned on. Here, in FIG. 25, a process of turning on (“1”) the D2 bit of the medal management flag is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S136, where the interrupt inhibition set in step S133 is canceled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above, the reason for not generating an interrupt between the processes of steps S134 and S135 is as follows.
In the present embodiment, in step S134, the blocker signal is turned on, and in step S135, the blocker state is turned on. In this case, when an interrupt occurs between step S134 and step S135, one is turned on and the other is turned off. Specifically, due to the interrupt process that is entered in the middle, inconsistency that ON is not output to the input display LED 79e (non-lighting) is generated even though ON is output to the blocker 45. In other words, in order to avoid such a state and to update both values at once, it is possible to control so as not to confuse the player by prohibiting interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the processing is executed in the order of steps S134 and S135, but on the contrary, the order of steps S135 and S134 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the blocker 45 is turned on after about 102 ms (“46” interrupt) has elapsed since the passage sensor 43a detected a medal, thereby forming a medal passage. The reason for this setting is to prevent the blocker 45 from being turned on at the moment when the inserted medal (medal detected by the passage sensor 43a) reaches the blocker 45, and the medal is prevented from being caught by the blocker 45. Therefore, after the passage sensor 43a detects a medal, the blocker 45 is controlled not to be turned on until a predetermined time (a time during which the medal may be pinched) elapses.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S55 of FIG.
First, in step S151, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 12 is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting key switch 12 is on (“1”) in the rising data of the input port 1. When it is on, the process proceeds to step S152, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S161. That is, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on in the medal insertion waiting state (when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot), the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the processing from step S152 to step S160 is executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the current setting value is confirmed (confirmed visually by the administrator), and the setting value cannot be changed.

In the next step S152, the blocker 45 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 44). Thereby, even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is returned from the payout slot.
In addition, when performing the process of step S152, it is not judged in FIG. 31 whether the monitoring time at the time of blocker off has passed. This is because it is unlikely that setting confirmation will be performed while inserting medals.
In the next step S153, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the start of setting value display. Then, in the next step S154, the control command set 1 is executed (control command data at the start of setting value display is set).

  Next, proceeding to step S155, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning on the set value display LED 73 (digit 5). Here, in the present embodiment, an LED display request flag (not shown) that determines which digit can be turned on is provided, and the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flag is turned on ( “1”) is executed. Thereby, the set value display LED 73 can be turned on, and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 73 is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S156, and it is continuously determined whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 12 is turned off. In this process, contrary to step S151, it is determined whether or not the falling data of the D3 bit of the input port 1 has become “1”. When it is determined that the signal of the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S157, and the main control board 50 executes a process of turning off the setting value display LED 73.

Next, proceeding to step S158, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the end of setting value display. Then, in the next step S159, control command set 1 is executed (control command data at the end of setting value display is set).
In the next step S160, the main control board 50 performs a process of turning on the blocker (FIG. 41). Next, proceeding to step S161, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game standby display start time has passed the “26846” interrupt (about 60 seconds) set in step S81 of FIG. Here, in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer values of the addresses “F02A (H)” and “F02B (H)” are “0” (here, “072C (H)” is set as an initial value). It shall be remembered.) When it is determined that it is “0”, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, and when it is not “0”, it is determined that the game standby display start time has not elapsed.
When “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “072C (H)” is stored as the timer value of the game standby display start time, the timer value is “00FF (H)”. When it is below, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S162, and a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is executed. This process is a process of updating the value of the acquired number data to “0” in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S161 that the game standby display start time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is cleared, but the storage number display LED 76, the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c, and the replay display LED 79f are not cleared. It is configured as follows. As a result, the fact that the player has the number of reserves that can be settled, that the player has bet, and that replay is possible continues to be displayed. It is possible not to make the player feel that the player has finished the game. Thereby, it can reduce that a player suffers a disadvantage.

  In addition, after the player finishes the game (leaves the seat by performing a checkout process, etc.), the player has finished the game with respect to other players and hall-related persons by continuing to display the number of acquired tickets. Since it is confused with not letting it feel that it is not (the player may still be trying to play), the number obtained is clear.

As described above, by the processing of step S81 in FIG. 35 and steps S161 and S162 in FIG. 42, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when about 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the acquired number is displayed. The display content of the LED 78 is cleared (set to “00”).
As a result, for example, when the reels 31 are rotating or when the winning combination is not won (whether or not winning of the winning combination is made) when all the reels 31 are stopped, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. State. For example, when the small combination 01 wins when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from “00” to “09”.

Although detailed processing is omitted, the display of the acquired number is cleared when a medal is inserted (when a medal is placed in a bet or when a medal is automatically inserted when a replay is awarded).
Since the above control is an example, for example, control is performed so that nothing is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during rotation of the reels 31, when a winning combination is not made when all the reels 31 are stopped, and when a medal is inserted. May be.

Note that “clearing the display of the acquisition number display LED 78” not only sets the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to “00” but also “* 0” or “**” ( “*” Indicates light extinction). In other words, this means that the display of the acquired number of games acquired by the player in the previous game is changed to another predetermined display.
Also, in the case of a specification that does not execute the process (step S102 in FIG. 35) for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c indicating the previous game bet number, when it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, Clear processing for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c (specifically, processing to clear the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address “F012 (H)”, or this bet number display LED data May be executed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S56 of FIG.
In FIG. 43, in step S171, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the blocker signal is on. When the blocker signal is on, the process proceeds to step S172, and when the blocker signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S173. Here, “the blocker signal is ON” corresponds to a case where a medal passage is formed by the blocker 45. Here, in FIG. 25, it is detected whether or not the D2 bit data of the medal management flag is ON.

In step S172, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the input sensor signal data is ON. Here, it is determined whether either the D1 or D2 bit of the level data of the input port 2 is “1”. If it is determined that the insertion sensor signal data is on, it means that the medal has been inserted, so the process proceeds to step S182, and a check process for medal maintenance is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S173.
Although details of the care medal check process in step S182 are not shown, this process determines whether or not the insertion sensors 1 and 2 have correctly detected the passage of the medal, and determines that the medal has been correctly detected. If it is, “1” is added to the bet medal or the stored medal. On the other hand, when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 do not correctly detect the passage of the medal, a predetermined error display process is executed. Further, when the care medal check process is executed, the D0 bit of the medal management flag (address “F011 (H)”) is set to “0”. Thereby, it can be notified that the operation of the start switch 41 is not acceptable.

In step S173, a request for checking whether or not it is possible to accept the betting operation and the settlement operation of the 1-bet switch 40a and the 3-bet switch 40b is set. Then, in the next step S174, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.
Next, proceeding to step S175, the main control board 50 determines whether or not operation acceptance is possible. When it is determined that the operation can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S176, and when it is determined that the operation cannot be accepted, the process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

By performing the above steps S173 to S175, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 46 can be accepted before performing the betting process or the settlement process. Only when the current state is in the correct state, the process proceeds to the betting process or the settlement process. For example, the level data and rising data of input port 0 are read by the processing of steps S173 to S175, and it is determined that the operation cannot be accepted when the level data and rising data of input port 0 do not match. .
In step S176, a confirmation request for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal is set. Here, the rising data of input port 0 is read.

In the next step S177, based on the reading in step S176, it is determined whether one of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the settlement switch 46 has risen. This process is a process of determining whether or not the D0, D1, and D2 bits are “1” in the rising data of the input port 0 read in step S173.
Specifically, for example, the read rise data of the input port 0 and “00000111 (B)” (definition data) are ANDed to clear the D3 to D7 bits. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0”.
When the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no rising of any signal (that is, it is determined that none of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 46 has changed operation), The process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  When it is determined in step S177 that the calculation result is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a rise of any signal, the process proceeds to step S178. In step S178, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This processing is processing for setting the D0 bit of the medal management flag in FIG. 25 to “0”. When the D0 bit of the medal management flag is “0”, the game start display LED 79d is turned off to indicate that the start switch 41 is not valid (invalid even if operated). On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the medal management flag is “1”, the game start display LED 79d is lit to indicate that the start switch 41 is valid. The actual output of turning on / off the game start display LED 79d is executed by an interrupt process (step S606 in FIG. 54).

Therefore, when one of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the settlement switch 46 is changed, the medal management flag data is used to notify that the acceptance of the start switch 41 is not permitted. , The process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b or the settlement switch 46 (the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 or the stored bet process in step S183 in FIG. 43) is executed.
The process based on the start switch 41 (for example, the role lottery process) is performed in the main process, and the settlement process and the stored bet process are also performed in the main process. Therefore, for example, the process based on the start switch 41 during the settlement process Is configured not to run.

In step S179, the main control board 50 sets a data confirmation request related to the settlement switch signal. This process is a process for confirming whether the D0 bit of the rising data of the input port 0 is “0” or “1”.
Then, in the next step S180, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a rising of the adjustment switch signal based on the reading in step S179. In this process, when the D0 bit is “0” in the rising data of the input port 0, it is determined that the settlement switch signal does not rise. When the D0 bit is “1”, the settlement switch signal rises. Judge that there is.

When it is determined that the settlement switch signal has risen, the process proceeds to step S181, and the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET: FIG. 45) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no rising of the settlement switch signal, it means that there is a rising of the bet switch signal, so that the process proceeds to step S183 and the stored bet process is executed.
In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the detailed flowchart of a storage bet process. In the stored bet process, it is determined whether or not there is a stored medal, and if the bet is possible in the case of having a stored medal, the bet process is executed.

In the above medal management process, it is determined in step S172 whether or not the data relating to the insertion sensor signal is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to a care medal check. It is determined whether or not the data relating to the settlement switch signal is on.
Therefore, since the physical medal insertion is preferentially checked over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46, swallowing of medals can be prevented.

  Here, “the physical medal insertion is preferentially checked over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46” is when the steps S53 to S58 in FIG. In the ON state, the data of the RWM 53 related to each input port is updated by the interrupt processing, and either the D1 or D2 bit level data of the input port 2 is “1” and the D0, D1 or D0 of the input port 0 A program in which the “care medal check (step S182)” is more easily executed than the “settlement process (step S181)” or the “reserved bet process (step S183)” when any of the rising data of the D2 bit is “1”. Refers to order or program processing.

Further, in step S180, the rising data of the settlement switch 46 is confirmed, and the subsequent process execution (the settlement process or the stored bet process) is determined.
One reason for this is that in the present embodiment, two switches, a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b, are provided as switches for executing the stored bet process, whereas switches for executing the settlement process are provided. Only one of the settlement switches 46 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to determine the settlement process or the stored bet process only by determining whether or not the rising data of the D0 bit (specific bit) of the input port 0 is ON. In other words, the processing is simplified and the program capacity is reduced rather than determining that “D1 bit or D2 bit is on?”.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the blocker off process (MS_BLOCKER_OFF) in step S152 of FIG. As described above, after the medal care becomes effective, when the medal care becomes impossible (cannot be accepted), the blocker 45 is turned off, and the medal maintained from the medal insertion slot 43 is discharged. Control to form a medal passage to be returned from.

  First, in step S191, the main control board 50 performs blocker signal confirmation processing. Here, the D6 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is confirmed in FIG.

  In step S192, the main control board 50 determines whether the blocker signal is off (the blocker signal data is “0”). When it is determined that it is not off, the process proceeds to step S193, and when it is determined that it is off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the blocker 45 is already turned off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without proceeding with the process for turning off the blocker 45.

If it is determined in step S192 that the blocker signal is not OFF and the process proceeds to step S193, the main control board 50 prohibits interruption from this point.
In the next step S194, the main control board 50 performs processing for turning off the blocker signal. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit of the output port 0 to “0”. Specifically, the D6 bit is set to “0” in the above blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data. As a result, the D6 bit of the output port 0 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. In the next step S195, a process for turning off the blocker state is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D2 bit of the medal management flag to “0” in FIG.
In step S196, the interrupt inhibition set in step S193 is cancelled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above process, no interruption is generated between the processes of steps S194 to S195, as in the blocker-on process.
In other words, if an interrupt occurs between the process of turning off the blocker signal and the process of turning off the blocker state, one of them is turned off and the other is turned on. Interrupt processing is prohibited to update the value of at once.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 in FIG.
First, in step S211, it is determined whether the monitoring time at blocker off has elapsed. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer value “F026 (H)” in FIG. 31 is “0”. If it is determined that the timer value is “0”, it is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed. When it is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S211. When it is determined that the monitoring time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Accordingly, the settlement process is not executed until the monitoring time at blocker off has elapsed. If it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has not elapsed, the processing is executed from step S57 of FIG.
In step S211, an output request at the start of settlement is set. This process is similar to step S70 in FIG. 34 and the like, and stores information to be transmitted as control commands in the D register and E register in order to transmit a control command for starting settlement to the sub-control board 80. is there. Specifically, “21 (H)” is stored in the D register and “55 (H)” is stored in the E register.

Next, it progresses to step S213 and it is judged whether it is at the time of a replay action | operation. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the operation state flag is “1” in FIG. 26. When it is “1”, it is determined that the replay operation is being performed. When it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S224, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S214.
If it is determined that it is not during replay operation, the process proceeds to step S214 and subsequent steps, and the bet medal settlement process is enabled. On the other hand, since there is no bet medal that can be settled at the time of replay operation, the process proceeds to step S224 and subsequent steps in order to allow the stored medal to be settled.

In step S214, a bet medal is read. In this process, the medal bet number data address “F06B (H)” in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register, and further, the address data indicated by the HL register value, that is, medal bet number data is stored in the A register. Execute the process.
In the next step S215, it is determined whether or not there is a bet medal. In this process, when the A register value is not “0”, it is determined that there is a bet medal, and when it is “0”, it is determined that there is no bet medal. When it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S216, and when it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224 (reservation process for stored medal).

In step S216, a blocker off process (FIG. 44) is executed. That is, during the checkout process, the blocker 45 is turned off in order not to accept medal insertion. Here, on the condition that it is determined in step S211 that the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S216. Therefore, when the blocker-off in step S216 is executed, the monitoring time at the time of blocker-off always elapses.
In the next step S217, control command set 1 (FIG. 36) is executed. As a result, a control command for starting betting medal settlement is stored in the control command buffer. Also, by executing this control command set 1, the A register value and the HL register value are used in the control command set 2 (FIG. 37), and therefore differ from the values set in step S214.

  In the next step S218, a bet medal is read. This process is the same as step S214. Since the A register value and the HL register value are different from those in step S214 by the process in step S217, the address of the bet number data is stored in the HL register again in the same manner as in the process in step S214. The data at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S219, and a single medal payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed. This process is a process of driving the hopper motor 36 while detecting the payout sensors 1 and 2, and paying out one actual medal from the hopper 35.
In step S220, a bet medal is read. This process is the same as step S214. Since the HL register is used in the payout process for one medal in step S219, the value differs from the HL register value set in step S218 after the completion of step S219. Therefore, in step S220, the bet medal is read again. (Process for storing the address of the bet number data in the HL register and storing the data of the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register).

In the next step S221, “1” is subtracted from the number of bet medals. That is, “1” is subtracted from the A register value, and the A register value is stored in the address (F06B (H)) indicated by the HL register value. Thereby, the medal bet number data is updated. In the next step S222, bet number display data is generated. This process is a process of updating the bet number display LED signal data in FIG. The LED signal data for the bet number display is based on the bet number.
LED signal data for displaying the number of bets (when one card is inserted): 00000001 (B)
LED signal data for displaying the number of bets (when two cards are inserted): 00000011 (B)
LED signal data for displaying the number of bets (when three cards are inserted): 00000111 (B)
It has become.
Therefore, immediately before step S222, when the bet number display LED signal data is “00000111 (B)” for three bets, the calculation is performed so that the bet number display LED signal data for two bets is obtained. “00000011 (B)”. In this case, an instruction that shifts to the right by 1 (an instruction that is not rotated) is issued, so that “00000111 (B)” → “00000011 (B)”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S223, and it is determined whether or not the bet medal settlement has been completed. This process determines whether or not the A register value stored at this point in the bet medal number data is “0”, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that the bet medal settlement has not ended. , “0”, it is determined that the betting medal settlement has been completed. If it is determined that the bet medal settlement has not ended, the process returns to step S218, and the bet medal settlement is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the betting medal has been settled, the process proceeds to step S234.

In addition, if it progresses to step S234, after that, a settlement process will be complete | finished, without performing settlement of a storage medal. Therefore, when there is a stored medal, the settlement switch 46 is operated again to perform the settlement process.
That is, in the example of FIG. 45, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, only the settlement of the bet medals is executed when the bet medals are held, and the settlement of the stored medals is not performed even when the pooled medals are held. In this case, when the settlement switch 46 is operated again, the settlement medal settlement process is executed.
Note that, not limited to such a two-stage settlement process, when it is determined in step S223 that the bet medal settlement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S224, and the settlement medal settlement may be started. That is, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, when both the bet medals and the stored medals are included, the settlement process for all medals may be executed.

If it is determined in step S213 that the replay operation is not being performed, or if it is determined in step S215 that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224.
In step S224, the stored number data is acquired. In this process, in FIG. 27, the value of the address “F06F (H)” storing the stored number display data is stored in the HL register, and the address data indicated by the HL register value, that is, the stored number display data is stored. This is a process of storing in the A register. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not there is a stored medal. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is determined that there is a stored medal, the process proceeds to step S226, and when it is determined that there is no stored medal, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S226, the blocker 45 is turned off as in step S216. In the next step S227, the control command set 1 is executed as in step S217. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer in order to transmit the control command for the stored medal settlement to the sub-control board 80.
Next, it progresses to step S228 and the process which lights up effect display LED79g is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D4 bit of the medal management flag to “1” in FIG. Note that after the D4 bit of the medal management flag becomes “1”, interrupt processing (FIG. 54) is executed, and when it is the lighting timing of the digit 5, the effect display LED 79g is lit in step S606.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S229, and the stored number display data is acquired again. In this process, similarly to step S224, the stored number display data address “F06F (H)” is stored in the HL register, and the address data (stored number display data) indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. It is. Similarly to the above, because the control command set 1 is executed in step S227, the HL register value and the A register value are different from the time point of step S224.

Next, the process proceeds to step S230, and in the same manner as in step S219, a single medal payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed. In the next step S231, “1” is subtracted from the stored number display data. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the A register value, and the A register value after the subtraction is stored in the address (F06F (H)) indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, the stored number display data is updated.
In the next step S232, it is determined whether or not the settlement medals have been settled. In step S231, it is determined whether or not the A register value after subtraction is “0”. If it is “0”, it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals has been completed, and if it is not “0”. Determines that the settlement of the stored medals has not been completed. When the settlement medal settlement has not ended, the process returns to step S229 to continue the settlement medal settlement. On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement of the stored medal has been completed, the process proceeds to step S233.

In step S233, the effect display LED is turned off. This process is the reverse of step S28. That is, in FIG. 25, processing for setting the D4 bit of the medal management flag to “0” is executed.
In the next step S234, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the end of payment. Specifically, “21 (H)” is stored in the D register and “71 (H)” is stored in the E register. Then, in the next step S235, the control command set 1 is executed. Further, the process proceeds to the next step S236, and a process of turning on the blocker 45 (FIG. 41) is executed. Therefore, after the settlement process is finished, the blocker 45 is turned on, and medals can be inserted. Here, after completion of the process of turning on the blocker 45, the process is executed from step S57 of FIG.

46 and 47 are flowcharts showing the medal single payout process (M_1MEDAL_PAY) in step S219 and step S230 in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart following FIG.
Although not shown in the flowchart, the AF register (A register and F register) is saved in the stack area (part of the storage area of the RWM 53) before executing step S251 which is the start of the medal single payout process. Then, before the step S273 described later, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored.
In step S251 in FIG. 46, the main control board 50 sets an error not detected. That is, a state in which no error is detected in the initial state is set. In the next step S252, the main control board 50 sets a medal jam error display request.
The medal jam error is referred to as “HP error” in the present embodiment. When this medal jam error occurs, a process of displaying “HP” on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed.
Here, “error” means a recoverable error. When a recoverable error occurs, the error content is displayed and the process is stopped. However, if the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (removing the error cause) and operates the reset switch 14, whether or not the error is cancelled. If it is determined that the error has been canceled, the process is resumed.

  In step S253, the main control board 50 determines whether an error has been detected. If it is determined that an error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S254 to display an error. Then, the process proceeds to step S255. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S253 that no error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S255.

In step S255, the main control board 50 sets the control time of the medal payout device 35. This processing is performed by adding “2686 (D)” (or “255 (D)” to the medal payout device control time at addresses “F028 (H)” and “F029 (H)” in FIG. D) ") is set. When the medal payout device control time is set, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt thereafter.
In step S256, a process for driving the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data is set to “1”. As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes “1” during the next interrupt processing.
In the next step S257, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout device control time has passed a predetermined time. In this processing, whether or not the timer value of the medal payout device control time is “0” (when “FF (H)” is not added), or is “00FF (H)” or less ( "FF (H)" addition) is determined, and if each is "0" or less than "00FF (H)", it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed. When it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260, and when it is determined that the medal payout apparatus control time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S258.

  In step S260, a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. In the next step S261, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process for setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. In step S262, it is determined whether the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on. Here, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S255, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S263.

In step S263, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has passed a predetermined time. This process determines whether or not the timer value set in step S261 (the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)”) has become “0”. It is determined that the sensor 1 hour has elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S264. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 time is not “0”, the process returns to step S262.
In step S264, the main control board 50 sets a medal empty error display request. The medal empty error is referred to as “HE error” in the present embodiment. When this medal empty error occurs, a process of displaying “HE” on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed. Then, the process proceeds from step S253 to step S254 to execute error display.
That is, even if the hopper motor 36 is driven, if the payout sensor 1 does not detect a medal, it is determined that there is no medal in the hopper 35.

In step S257, it is determined that the medal payout control time has elapsed, and in step S258, it is determined whether the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on. Here, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S259, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process returns to step S257.
In step S259, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process for setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S265.

In step S265, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. This process is performed when the timer value of the payout sensor 1 detection time set in step S259 becomes “0” before the signal of the payout sensors 1 and 2 is detected in step S267, which will be described later. It is determined that it has been detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S252, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S266.
In step S266, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is on. In this process, as in step S258, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S267, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S257.

In step S267, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are on. In this process, it is determined whether or not both the D3 bit and the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data are “1” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are ON (both bits are “1”), the process proceeds to step S268. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are not ON, the process returns to step S265.
In step S268, the detection time of the payout sensor 2 is set. This process is a process for setting the timer value “46” to the payout sensor check time of the address “F023 (H)” in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S269 (FIG. 47).

  In step S269, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. This process is performed when the timer value becomes “0” before detecting the turn-off of the payout sensor 2 signal in step S270, or when the timer value becomes “0” before detecting the turn-off of the payout sensor 1 signal in step S272. When it becomes “0”, it is determined that a medal clogging is detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S252, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S270.

In step S270, it is determined whether or not the payout sensor 2 signal is turned off. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data is “0” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S271. When it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is not OFF, the process returns to step S269.
In step S271, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. When it is determined that it is invalid, the process proceeds to step S257, and when it is determined that it is not invalid, the process proceeds to step S272. In step S272, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is “0” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S273, and when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not OFF, the process returns to step S269.

In step S273, “1” is subtracted from the remaining payout number (count value). As described above, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored before step S273. In step S273, a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored in the A register is executed.
Next, proceeding to step S274, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the A register value after subtraction of “1” is “0”. If it is “0”, it is determined that the medal payout has been completed.

  When it is determined that the medal payout has been completed, the process proceeds to step S275, and when it is determined that the medal has not been completed, this flowchart is ended. In step S275, the main control board 50 performs a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes “0” during the next interrupt process (an off signal is output as the hopper drive signal). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the example of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260, the hopper motor drive signal is turned off, and the payout sensor 1 detection time is set in step S261. did. When the payout sensor 1 detection time has elapsed before detecting the turn-on of the payout sensor 1 signal (“Yes” in step S263), the process proceeds to step S264 and an HE error is set.
However, not limited to the above processing, if it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260 to turn off the hopper motor drive signal, and then proceeds to step S264 to generate an HE error. May be set. That is, if the payout sensor 1 signal is not detected until the medal payout device control time elapses, a HE error may be immediately set.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start switch check process (M_START_CHK) in step S58 of FIG.
First, in step S281, it is determined whether or not the prescribed numbers match. In this process, the number of medals bet at this point is read from the medal bet number data in FIG. 27, and for example, it is determined whether or not it is “3” if a normal game is being played. When it is determined that the number of bets matches the specified number, the process proceeds to step S282, and when it is determined that they do not match, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34). With this process, if a specified number of medals are not betted, the start switch check process does not proceed even if the start switch 41 is operated (the game is not started).

In step S282, it is determined whether the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The medal management flag address “F011 (H)” in FIG. 25 is stored in the HL register.
(2) In FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the monitoring time when the blocker is off at the address “F026 (H)” is “0”. to decide.
When it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284. When it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S283.
In step S283, the game start display LED signal is turned off. This processing is processing for setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of “F011 (H)” in FIG. 25 to “0”. Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S282 that the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed and the process proceeds to step S284, the game start display LED signal is turned on. This processing is processing for setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of “F011 (H)” to “1”. Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).
Next, proceeding to step S285, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the rising data of the input port 0 in FIG. 21 is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) in step S59. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.

  If the process proceeds to accepting the start switch in step S59, the blocker 45 is turned off in step S294 in FIG. Therefore, in step S282, the blocker 45 is turned off on the condition that it is determined that the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed. For this reason, in the flow of FIG. 49, it is not determined whether the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed immediately before the execution of the blocker-off in step S294.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL) in step S59 in FIGS.
In step S291, the internal random number is stored in the MPU register (random number soft latch register). Here, the random number is latched (obtained), and it is step S60 in FIG. 34 to determine whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to the winning combination.
In the next step S292, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. That is, in FIG. 25, the D0 bit of the medal management flag is cleared (set to “0”).
In step S293, the setting change permission flag is cleared. In this processing, the D6 bit of the medal management flag is set to “1” in FIG. As a result, the setting cannot be changed.

In the next step S294, the blocker 45 is turned off (FIG. 44). That is, after the start switch 41 is operated, control is performed so that a medal is not accepted. In the next step S295, a bet medal is read. The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S296, the main control board 50 sets a reel rotation disclosure output request. Here, “13 (H)” is set in the D register.
In step S297, the bet medal number (A register value) read in step S295 is set in the E register.

In the next step S298, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the information of the D register and the E register set in steps S296 and S297 in the control command buffer.
Next, proceeding to step S299, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the set value stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is in the normal range (1 to 6). When it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S300, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S305, and an unrecoverable error process (E6 error) is executed.

In step S300, a bet medal is read. Then, the read bet medal number is stored in the A register. Although the bet medal is read in step S295, the bet medal is read again because the A register value is changed by the control command set 1 in step S298.
When a replay is won, the number of medals automatically bet is set as the number of bet medals. In step S301, the number of read bet medals is doubled. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the medal bet signal output count address (F070 (H)) in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S302, interrupt processing is prohibited. In step S303, the medal bet signal output count is set. In this processing, the value (medal bet signal output count) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register (doubled bet medal number) are added, and the added value is stored in the A register. It is processing to do. Further, the value of the A register is stored in the address (F070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value. Thereby, the medal bet signal output count is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S304, interrupt processing is permitted, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  The processes in steps S302 to S304 described above prohibit interruption before and after the update of the medal bet signal output count. By prohibiting the interruption, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the updating of the medal bet signal and the process of updating the medal bet signal output frequency from being executed. In other words, after the process of updating the medal bet signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal bet signal is permitted to be updated.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when outputting a medal bet signal, the actual medal bet number is calculated by doubling, and the value is set as the number of outputs. As described above, this control is performed so that when a medal bet signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeats on and off, one medal bet number is represented by two times of on and off. This is because it is controlled. The same applies to the medal payout. When outputting the medal payout signal to the outside, the medal payout number is calculated by doubling the value, and the value is set as the medal payout signal output count, so that one medal payout number is represented by ON and OFF twice. Control.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY) in step S63 in FIG.
In step S311, it is determined whether or not the minimum game period has elapsed. In this process, in FIG. 31, whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time of the addresses “F02C (H)” and “F02D (H)” is “0” (“FF (H)” is not added). Or “00FF (H)” or less (when “FF (H)” is added). In the present embodiment, the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is set to about 4.1 seconds.

  If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S312 and the minimum game time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value of the minimum game time to the addresses “F02C (H)” and “F02D (H)” in FIG. As described above, the timer value to be set is “072C (H)” corresponding to “1836 (D)”, or “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to this value (2091). (Corresponding to (D)). Accordingly, when the minimum game time is set in step S312, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt from this point, and whether or not the timer value is "0" in step S311 in the next game ( It is determined whether “FF (H)” is not added) or whether it is equal to or less than “00FF (H)” (when “FF (H)” is added).

In the next step S313, the condition device number is acquired. In this process, in the H register, the accessory condition device number of the address “F084 (H)” in FIG. 28 is stored, and the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F083 (H)” is stored in the L register. It is processing.
In the conditional device information output bit set in the next step S314, the D7 bit of the H register is set to “1”, and the D6 bit of the L register is set to “1”. This process is a process for creating the accessory condition device information from the accessory condition device number and creating the winning and replay condition device information from the winning and replay condition device number.
In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit is “1” in the upper 2 bits of the condition device information, it indicates the accessory condition device information, and when the D6 bit is “1”, winning and replaying are performed. It is set to indicate conditional device information (see FIG. 29).

In step S315, the condition device information is stored. In this processing, the H register value is stored in the accessory condition device information of the address “F092 (H)” in FIG. 29, and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information of the address “F091 (H)”. It is a process to memorize.
In step S316, the condition device information output time is stored. This process is a process of storing the timer value “25” in the condition device output time of the address “F024 (H)” in FIG. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period of “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”, the accessory condition device information and the winning and replay condition device information are output to the outside (test machine). The condition device output time set here is subtracted by “1” from the next interruption process (FIG. 54) in step S605 described later.
The condition device information is information for output to the testing machine, and is not actually output in the market. However, the ROM 54 storing the program processing necessary for output and the RWM 53 (storage area) capable of storing the information that is the basis of the condition device information and the output time of the condition device information are also provided in the slot machine 10 in the market. ing. In other words, the processing for outputting the conditional device information is executed by the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 provided in the slot machine 10 in the market, but the conditional device information is not output.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP) in step S65 in FIG.
First, in step S321, the number of shifted frames is created. The number of shifted frames is synonymous with the number of sliding frames. This process is created before stop acceptance is executed based on the lottery result (winning number) of the combination (condition device) by the combination lottery means 61. Also, it is created for all stop symbol numbers that may be accepted for stop.

Although not shown, the RWM 53 has a storage area for the number of shifted frames of 60 (60 bytes) in total for 20 symbols (0 to 19) for all three reels 31.
In principle, a value obtained by adding the number of frames shifted to the stop reception symbol number is the stop symbol number.
Also, for example, after the left reel is stopped, the number of shifted frames for the middle reel and the right reel is recreated based on the stop reception symbol number or the stop symbol number of the left reel.

In the next step S322, it is determined whether or not stop acceptance is possible. This process is performed for all reels 31 with “0” to “0” to the left reel symbol number (for passing position), the middle reel symbol number (for passing position), and the right reel symbol number (for passing position) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the symbol number “19 (D)” is stored. If symbol numbers “0” to “19 (D)” are stored, it is determined as “Yes” and “FF (H ) ”Is stored,“ No ”is determined. As described above, “FF (H)” is stored in the reel symbol number (for passing position) when the reel sensor has not passed.
When it is determined in step S322 that stop acceptance is possible, the process proceeds to step S323, and when it is determined that stop acceptance is not possible, the process proceeds to step S328.
In step S323, it is determined whether the reel stop acceptance waiting time has elapsed. This process reads the reel stop acceptance waiting time at address “F022 (H)” in FIG. 31, and determines that the waiting time has elapsed when the timer value is “0”. When it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to 328. During this standby time, a new number of shifted frames is calculated, and the calculated number of shifted frames can be stored in the RWM 53.

In step S324, it is determined whether a rising edge of the stop switch signal has been detected. This process determines whether or not the D5 to D7 bits of the input port 0 rising data in FIG. 21 are “1”, and when it is determined that any of them is “1”, the stop switch 42 is Judge that it was operated. When it is determined that the rising edge of the stop switch signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S326. When it is determined that the stop switch signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S325.
In step S325, it is determined whether or not a stop operation for all the reels 31 has been performed. When it is determined that the stop operation of all the reels 31 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S328, and when it is determined that the stop operation of all the reels 31 has not been performed, the process returns to step S324.

  When the process proceeds from step S324 to step S326, the reel stop acceptance start time is set. This process is a process of setting “7” to the reel stop acceptance waiting time of the address “F022 (H)” in FIG. Therefore, when “7” is set as the reel stop acceptance waiting time at this time, “1” is subtracted by “1” for each interrupt in the subsequent interrupt processing. Then, “No” is determined in step S323 until the reel stop acceptance standby time becomes “0”, and after “0”, “Yes” is determined in step S323.

  After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327, and the stop position is stored. This process is a process of storing the reel symbol number (for the stop position) in FIG. 28 for the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42. As described above, the stop symbol number is a value obtained by adding the number of frames shifted to the stop acceptance symbol number. Therefore, this step S327 is performed for all of the left, middle and right reels 31, and each time the left, middle and right stop switches 42 are operated, the left reel symbol number ( (For stop position), middle reel symbol number (for stop position), and right reel symbol number (for stop position) are stored.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S328, and the stopped state of all reels is checked. In this process, it is determined whether or not the statuses of all the reels 31 are stopped. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the rotating reel 31 does not stop at that moment but stops through the deceleration process of the motor 32. Therefore, in step S328, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are in a stopped state regardless of whether or not they are actually stopped. Whether all the reels 31 have actually stopped is determined in the next step S329.

In the next step S329, it is checked whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped (the status of all the reels is stopped), the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 are not stopped, the process returns to step S321.
Here, as described above, in the creation of the number of shifted frames in the first step S321, all the symbol numbers of the left, middle and right reels 31 are created, but any one of the stop switches 42 is operated, When the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 stops, when the process returns from step S329 to step S321, the number of shifted frames is newly created for all the symbol numbers of the remaining reels.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S68 of FIG.
First, in step S341, an output request at the start of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing information indicating the number of acquired (paid out) sheets in a predetermined register. Specifically, “22 (H)” is stored in the D register, and the acquired (paid out) number is stored in the E register. In the next step S342, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53.
In step S343, a medal number setting process is executed. This processing executes the following processing.
(1) The medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” in FIG. 27 is stored in the D register.
(2) The medal bet number data at address “F06B (H)” in FIG. 27 is stored in the E register.
In the next step S344, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process for determining the on / off state of each bit of the operating state flag in FIG.

Next, it progresses to step S345 and it is judged whether it is at the time of 1BB operation | movement. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined based on whether or not the D3 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S346, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S350.
In step S346, obtainable number data at the time of 1BB operation is acquired. This process is a process of storing, in the A register, data of the number of obtainable sheets at the time of 1BB operation stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53. Then, in the next step S347, it is determined whether or not the acquired number upper limit value at the time of 1BB operation has been reached. Here, the information in the D register (medal payout number data) is subtracted from the value stored in the A register, the calculation result is stored in the A register, and the value stored in the A register is not negative (carry flag ≠ “1” )). When it is determined that the value is not negative, it is determined as “No” (the upper limit value of the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation is not reached).

When it is determined that the upper limit value for the number of acquired images at the time of 1BB operation has been reached, the process proceeds to step S348, and when it is determined that the number has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S348, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation is cleared. This process is a process of performing an “XOR” operation on the A register value and the A register value and storing the operation result in the A register. By this arithmetic processing, the value of the A register is always “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S349, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the acquirable number when the RWM 53 operates 1BB. Then, the process proceeds to step S350.

In step S350, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process of storing the E register value (medal bet number data) in the A register. Thereby, medal bet number data is stored in the A register.
In the next step S251, it is determined whether or not a replay is displayed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the D0 bit (replay) of the symbol combination display flag is “1” in FIG. When the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is “1” (when replay display is being performed), the process proceeds to step S353, and when it is determined that replay display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S352.

In step S352, the medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process of storing the D register value (medal payout number data) in the A register. Thereby, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.
With the above processing, when the replay is won, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data value set at step S343. The set medal payout number data value.
In step S353, a process of doubling the number of medals stored in the A register is executed. The reason for doubling is to transmit a payout signal that has been doubled as described above. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the medal payout signal output count address, that is, “F071 (H)” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register.

In step S354, interrupt processing is prohibited. In the next step S355, a medal payout signal output count is set. In this process, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. By this processing, the value of the medal payout signal output count is updated. In the next step S356, interrupt processing is permitted.
With the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after the value of the medal payout signal output count is updated.
By prohibiting the interruption, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the update of the medal payout signal and the process of updating the medal payout signal output frequency from being executed. That is, after the process of updating the medal payout signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal payout signal is allowed to be updated.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set to 10. However, there is a possibility that the number of payouts in the next game is updated during the output of the medal payout signal accompanying the payout of 10 medals. Low. However, when the medal payout number is changed in the development process (for example, the maximum payout number is changed from 10 to 15), the payout number may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if interrupt prohibition processing is provided as in this embodiment, even if the number of medals paid out is changed during development (for example, up to 15), changes in the program can be reduced.

  In step S355, it is meaningful to set the number of medal payout signal outputs before the actual medal payout process. Specifically, the medal payout signal output count is created from the medal payout number data except when a replay is won. At this time, if the payout process (after step S357 in FIG. 52) is performed before the medal payout signal output count is set, the medal payout number data is updated, and the correct number of medal payout signals are not output. This is because there is a risk of losing.

In the next step S357, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the D register value (medal payout number data), and it is determined whether or not the value after the subtraction is “0”. When it is “0”, it is determined that there is no medal payout. When it is determined that there is a medal payout, the process proceeds to step S358, and when it is determined that there is no medal payout, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S358, the number of stored sheets is read. This process is a process of reading the value of the stored number display data at the address “F06F (H)” in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S359, and it is determined whether or not the medal storage number is a limit value. When the value of the read stored number display data is “50”, it is determined that the stored number is the limit value and the process proceeds to step S363. When it is determined that the stored number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S360. move on.

In step S360, a standby time for adding a stored medal is set. In the present embodiment, as in step S115 of FIG. 38, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) of the number of interrupts is set to set about 100 ms as the wait time. For this reason, “00000000 (B)” is set in the B register, and “00101110 (B)” is set in the C register. In step S361, a 2-byte time waiting process (FIG. 39) is executed. As described above, this process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”. When the two-byte time waiting process in step S361 ends, the process proceeds to step S362, and one stored number is added. This process is a process of adding “1” to the stored number display data of the address “F06F (H)” in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S364.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S359 to step S363, a medal one payout process (FIG. 46) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets (stored number display data) is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number reaches the limit value, the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35 (medal 1 sheet payout process) is executed.

In step S364, the acquisition number display is set to “+1”. This process is a process of adding “1” to the acquired number data in FIG. Thereby, for example, when the display so far is “02”, the display is updated to “03”.
In the next step S365, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal payout number data in FIG. In step S366, it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the updated medal payout number data is “0”. When it is determined that the medal payout number data is “0”, the process proceeds to step S367, and when it is determined that the medal payout number data is not “0”, the process returns to step S358.

  In step S367, an output request at the end of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the end of medal payout in a register. In the next step S368, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the payout process described above, when paying out by adding one stored number, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes in steps S361 and S362. Thereby, it can be shown to a player so that storage number display LED76 may count up. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 76 before storage addition is “08” and nine medals are added to the storage, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms wait processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Wait process →... → 100 ms wait process → display “17”. On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when adding one stored number, the display “08” is instantaneously changed to the display “17”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a payout sound ("Plululu ...") output from the sub-control board 80 side is executed by executing a 2-byte waiting process for each addition. ) And counting up the number of stored sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the processes after step S363, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S360 and S371 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven and paid out, so that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one piece as described above. As a result, the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, so when waiting for an actual medal, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S69 of FIG.
In step S381, a process of clearing the condition device flag (also referred to as winning information) is performed. This process is a process for clearing items other than the special role condition device. When it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped on the effective line, the special role condition device is also cleared. In the next step S382, the replay display LED is turned off. This process corresponds to the process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag to “0” in FIG. In step S383, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process for setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to “0” in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG. In other words, the interrupt process of FIG. 54 can be executed at a predetermined cycle. In this embodiment, the interrupt cycle is set to 2.235 ms, but is not limited to this cycle.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined value by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50 (not shown), the power is supplied to the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
When power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing in step S619. When it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the interrupt counter value in FIG.
In the next step S605, timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT; FIG. 55) is performed. This process is a process for updating (subtracting, etc.) all the timer values shown in FIG.
Next, it progresses to step S606 and LED display control is performed. In this process, the set value, the number of stored sheets, the number of acquired sheets, the error display content (error code), etc. are turned on using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.

  In step S72 in FIG. 34 or in the non-recoverable error shown in step S620 in FIG. 54, an error display is output by the main process. However, the setting value, the stored number, the acquired number, Recoverable errors are displayed by LED display control in step S606 every time interrupt processing is performed.

  In step S607, input ports 0 to 2 (FIG. 18) are read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and data (level data, rising edge) based on the input ports 0 to 2 are read. Data, falling data; FIGS. 21 to 23) are generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. In the next step S608, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied.

  In step S609, it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S620 to shift to an unrecoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, a path sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK; FIG. 56) is performed. This process is a process of detecting whether or not the passage sensor 43a has risen and setting a timer value related to the blocker 45 based on the detection result.
In the next step S613, control command transmission is performed. In this process, for example, the control commands set in the output request set and the control command set 1 (untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 53) are output from the output ports 5 and 6, for example, the output port 8 This is a process of transmitting data in which a bit (for example, D4 bit) corresponding to a data strobe signal (not shown) of “1” is set to “1” to the sub-control board 80 by outputting from the output port 8.

Here, the “data strobe signal” is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80 together with the sub control data signals 1 to 16. When receiving the data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 controls to acquire the data of the sub control data signals 1 to 16 from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
When a control command is set in the control command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, an interrupt process after that point (in principle, if the control command buffer is empty, the interrupt process that comes after that point In step S613, a control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. After the output processing from the output ports 5 and 6 is executed, the data trobe signal (for example, D4 bit) of the output port 8 is set to “0”.

  In the next step S614, external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL; FIG. 57) is performed, and in the next step S615, external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT; FIG. 58) is performed. These processes are processes for setting output data of an external signal output from the output port 4 (stored in a register) and transmitting the signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100 shown in FIG.

In the next step S616, conditional device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT; FIG. 59) is performed. This process is performed by a tester for determining whether or not the slot machine 10 is appropriately designed according to the law by writing (setting) data to the output port 7 based on the data stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, it is a process of transmitting a conditional device signal as a test signal.
In step S617, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, the ON / OFF of the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79g), and the set value display LED 73 is controlled by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Since dynamic lighting is executed for the digits 1 to 5, lighting processing is performed for any one digit in the LED display control in step S606. For this reason, the digit lighting timing comes once every five interrupts.
Further, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the control command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and performs processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
In other words, at the time of an unrecoverable error, transmission of the control command from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 is not performed, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Further, if an untransmitted control command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the control buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) shown in step S605 in FIG.
In step S631, a measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address indicates a reference address. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, “F021 (H)” is the reference address. Therefore, in step S631, “F021 (H)” is set in the HL register.

  In step S632, the 1-byte timer number is set in the B register. The number of 1-byte timers indicates the number of 1-byte timers in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, the total number of 1-byte timers is “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)”. Therefore, “7” is set in the B register here.

  In the next step S633, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. For example, when “46 (D)” is stored in “F021 (H)”, “45 (D)” is obtained. Further, when a carry occurs as a result of subtracting “1” (that is, when the value before subtraction is “0”), “0” is stored.

In step S634, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value.
In the next step S635, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is “0”. When the B register value after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not ended.
When it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S636. When it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S633.
By repeating the above steps S633 to 635, all seven 1-byte timers are decremented by “1” (however, as described above, when “0” is stored as the 1-byte timer value, “ 0 "is maintained.).

In step S636, the 2-byte timer number is set in the B register. This process is a process for setting the number of 2-byte timers in FIG. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, since there are three 2-byte timers, “3” is stored in the B register.
In the next step S637, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this processing, “1” is subtracted from 2-byte data with the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value as the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” as the upper digit.
A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
HL register value = F028 (H) (hereinafter the same),
F028 (H) = 05 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F028 (H) = 04 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
It becomes.

(2) Example 2
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 01 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F028 (H) = FF (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(3) Example 3
F028 (H) = 50 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F028 (H) = 4F (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

(4) Example 4
F028 (H) = 01 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(5) Example 5
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
When subtracting "1" when
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S638, the next timer address is set. In this process, “1” is added to the HL register value, and “1” is further added to the HL register value. Thereby, “2” is added to the HL register value. In other words, since the address indicated by the HL register value is shifted by two, for example, when “F028 (H)” has been designated so far, “F02A (H)” is designated by the calculation.
In the next step S639, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. When the B register value after the subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement is not finished. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S637. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
By repeating the above steps S637 to 639, all three 2-byte timers are decremented by “1” (however, as described above, when “0” is stored as the 2-byte timer value, “ 0 "is maintained.).

As described above, by sequentially arranging the addresses of the 1-byte timers, it is possible to sequentially update the timer values stored in the addresses of the 1-byte timers only by looping the processing of steps S633 to S635.
Similarly, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 2-byte timers, it is possible to sequentially update the timer values stored in the addresses of the 2-byte timers only by looping the processing of steps S637 to S639. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Also, the storage area of the 1-byte timer (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) and the storage area of the 2-byte timer (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) are stored, so that the address is stored in the HL register. The processing to be performed only needs to be performed once (step S631 in FIG. 55), and thereafter, the HL register value is “+1” or “+2” (the processing of “+1” the HL register value is repeated twice). Since it is possible to specify an address to be updated of the timer value, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Specifically, a program that stores an address in the HL register is an instruction that requires 3 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54, but a program that increments the HL register value by “+1” is an instruction that requires only 1 byte as a storage area in the ROM 54. A program for “+2” the HL register value is an instruction that requires only 2 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54. These effects also apply to a second embodiment (modified example) described later.

As described with reference to FIG. 31, for a 1-byte timer, in the case of a reel stop reception waiting time of a predetermined value, for example, “F022 (H)”, “7 (H ) ”Is set.
On the other hand, for the 2-byte timer, for example, in the case of the minimum game time, “072C (H)” corresponding to “1836 (D)” is set in step S312 in FIG. In some cases, “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “(H)” is set.
In the former case, when the timer value is “0”, it is determined in step S311 that the minimum game time has elapsed in FIG. This is the same as the 1-byte timer.

Here, when “072C (H)” is set as the minimum game time, “2C (H)” is stored in “F02C (H)” (lower digit), and “7 (H)” is stored in “F02D ( H) ”(upper digit).
When updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes consisting of “F02C (H)” (lower digit) and “F02D (H)” (upper digit) at every interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) “1” is subtracted from the data.
Further, when determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F02C (H)” (lower digit) is L The data stored in the register, the data stored in “F02D (H)” (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and when the HL register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), the minimum game time is Judge that it has passed.

On the other hand, when “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “072C (H)” is set as the minimum game time, “2B (H)” is set to “F02C (H)” ( (Lower digit) and “8 (H)” is stored in “F02D (H)” (upper digit).
When updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes consisting of “F02C (H)” (lower digit) and “F02D (H)” (upper digit) at every interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) “1” is subtracted from the data.
Further, when determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the data stored in the high-order 1-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F02D (H)” (high-order digit) is “ When it is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed.

The same applies to other 2-byte timers.
In FIG. 31, when setting “0A7E (H)” not adding “FF (H)” to the medal payout device control time of addresses “F028 (H)” and “F029 (H)”, set “7E ( "H)" is stored in "F028 (H)" (lower digit), and "A (H)" is stored in "F029 (H)" (upper digit).
When the medal payout device control time is updated, “F028 (H)” (lower digit) and “F029 (H)” (upper digit) are included for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). “1” is subtracted from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether or not the medal payout device control time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F028 (H)” (lower digit)) Is stored in the L register, the data stored in “F029 (H)” (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and when the HL register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), the medal is paid out. It is determined that the device control time has elapsed.

On the other hand, when setting “0B7D (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “0A7E (H)” as the medal payout device control time, “7D (H)” is set to “F028 (H)”. "(Lower digit) and" B (H) "is stored in" F029 (H) "(upper digit).
When the medal payout device control time is updated, “F028 (H)” (lower digit) and “F029 (H)” (upper digit) are included for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). “1” is subtracted from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether or not the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the data stored in “F029 (H)” (upper digit) when the 1-byte data of the upper digit is “0”. Is “0” (when the zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

Similarly, in FIG. 31, when setting “68DE (H)” not adding “FF (H)” to the game standby display start time of the addresses “F02A (H)” and “F02B (H)”, “DE (H)” is stored in “F02A (H)” (lower digit), and “68 (H)” is stored in “F02B (H)” (upper digit).
When the game standby display start time is updated, it is composed of “F02A (H)” (lower digit) and “F02B (H)” (upper digit) for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). “1” is subtracted from the 2-byte data.
Also, when determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F02A (H)” (lower digit)) Is stored in the L register, the data stored in “F02B (H)” (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and when the HL register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), the game waits It is determined that the display start time has elapsed.

On the other hand, when “69DD (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “68DE (H)” is set as the game standby display start time, “DD (H)” is set to “F02A (H)”. "(Lower digit) and" 69 (H) "is stored in" F02B (H) "(upper digit).
When the game standby display start time is updated, it is composed of “F02A (H)” (lower digit) and “F02B (H)” (upper digit) for each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed). “1” is subtracted from the 2-byte data.
Further, when determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed, the data stored in the upper digit 1-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F02B (H)” (upper digit)). Is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

As described above, when “FF (H)” is added, it is possible to determine that the timer value has become “0” simply by determining whether or not the upper byte (upper digit) has become “0”. Is described below. In the following description, a decimal number is taken as an example for easy understanding.
For example, when the timer value is “1956”, if “FF (H)” is not added, “1956” is stored in the RWM 53. Here, since the lower digit is “56” and the upper digit is “19”, each is stored in the storage area of the RWM.
When determining whether or not “1956” has elapsed, it is necessary to determine whether or not both the upper digit storage area and the lower digit storage area of the RWM storage area have become “0”. There is.

On the other hand, when the timer value is “1956” and “FF (H)” is added, “2055” obtained by adding “99” to “1956” is stored in the RWM 53. .
In this case, “55” is stored as the lower digit and “20” is stored as the upper digit.
With this setting, when determining whether “1956” has elapsed, it is possible to determine whether “1956” has elapsed simply by determining whether the upper digit has become “0”.
Specifically, after storing “2055” and subtracting “1” by one,
2055 → 2054 → ・ ・ ・ → 0101 → 0100 → 00099 → ・ ・ ・ → 0000
It becomes. Then, when the timer value reaches “0099”, it can be determined that “1856” has elapsed.

As described above, “99”, which is the maximum value of the lower digits, is added when considered in decimal numbers, but “FF (H)”, which is the maximum value that can be stored in a 1-byte storage area, is added in hexadecimal numbers. to add.
When the timer value becomes “00FF (H)” (the upper digit is “0”), it can be determined that the timer value before adding “FF (H)” has become “0”. .

For example, the minimum game time (1837 interrupt) will be described as an example.
072C (H) → 072B (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0700 (H) → 06FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ... → 0001 (H) → 0000 (H )
It becomes.
Here, the number of interrupts from “072C (H)” to “0000 (H)” is “1837”.
In contrast, in “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to “072C (H)”,
082B (H) → 082A (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0800 (H) → 07FF (H) → ・ ・ ・ → 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ... → 0000 (H)
It becomes.
Here, the number of interrupts from “082B (H)” to “00FF (H)” is “1837”. That is, the minimum game time elapses when the upper digit changes from “08 (H)” to “00 (H)”.
In this way, for each interrupt, “1” is subtracted from the lower digit, but the minimum game time can be reduced by simply determining whether the upper digit is “0” regardless of the value of the lower digit. It can be determined whether the time has elapsed.

When a timer value obtained by adding “FF (H)” is set, when the timer value becomes “00FF (H)”, it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed, but after that, The byte timer value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt. Therefore, if the timer value is not reset, the timer value finally becomes “0000 (H)”. Further, even after “0000 (H)” is reached, “1” is subtracted (updated) for each interrupt, and “0000 (H)” is maintained.
Here, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed (when it becomes “00FF (H)”), a process of setting the lower byte to “0” may be executed.
However, regardless of the timer value, if the process of subtracting “1” for each interrupt is continued, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the process can be simplified (program capacity Reduction).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the passage sensor check (PAHTSEN_CHK) in step S612 in FIG.
First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the passage sensor has risen. In this process, when the D0 bit of the input port 1 rising data is “1” in FIG. 22, it is determined that the passage sensor has risen. When it is determined that the passage sensor has risen, the process proceeds to step S702. When it is determined that the passage sensor has not risen, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S702, the blocker-off monitoring time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “144 (D)” to the address “F026 (H)” in FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S703, the blocker-on monitoring time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value “45 (D)” to the address “F027 (H)” in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

Here, when the blocker-off monitoring time and the blocker-on monitoring time are set, “1” is subtracted from the next interrupt process in step S605 in FIG.
Whether or not the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed is determined, for example, in step S132 in FIG.
Further, for example, in step S211 in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the blocker-off monitoring time has elapsed.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL) in step S614 in FIG.
First, in step S731, an external signal output flag is acquired in FIG. The acquired value is stored in the B register. The bits acquired here are D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) out of 8 bits. These D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) correspond to the output port 4 (FIG. 20).
In this process, the B register is used as a register for storing external signal output data.

Next, proceeding to step S732, it is determined whether the door switch signal is on. In this processing, the address “F00A (H)” of the input port 1 level data in FIG. 22 is stored in the HL register. Next, the address data indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. Then, an AND operation is performed on the A register value and “00000010”, and when the calculation result is not “0” (when zero flag ≠ “1”), “Yes” is determined.
When it is determined that the door switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S733. When it is determined that the door switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S734.
In step S733, the external signal 5 output data is set. In this process, “1” is added to the B register value. Here, the D0 bit of the B register value so far is “0”, but the D0 bit of the B register is set to “1” by this processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S734. The D0 bit corresponds to the D0 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. Note that the present invention is not limited to the method of adding “1” to the B register value, and any operation that makes the D0 bit of the B register “1” is acceptable.

In step S734, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit is “1” in the data (input port 1 level data; FIG. 22) of the address “F00A (H)” indicated by the HL register value. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S737. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S735.
In the next step S735, the data of the abnormal input flag is stored in the A register in FIG. The abnormal input flag is not shown in FIG. 54, but is generated at the time of interrupt processing. Further, in FIG. 31, the value of the external signal 4 output time and the A register value at the time of power-off recovery at the address “F025 (H)” are ORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.

In the next step S736, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value calculated in step S735) is “0”. When the value of the A register is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that there is no data, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S736, the process proceeds to step S737, and the D1 bit of the B register is set to “1”. In other words, the D1 bit of the B register is set to “1” when a recoverable error has occurred or when the external signal 4 output time has not elapsed at the time of power-off recovery. The D1 bit corresponds to the D1 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
With the above external signal output data management, the D0 to D4 bits of the B register are set to a predetermined value.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the external signal output (I_COUNTER_OUT) in step S615 of FIG.
First, in step S741, the following processing is executed.
(1) In FIG. 30, the address (F094 (H)) of the RWM 53 storing medal signal data is stored in the DE register.
(2) In FIG. 31, the address “F021 (H)” external signal output time value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is “0” (when zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the external signal output time has ended. When it is determined that the external signal output time has ended, the process proceeds to step S742, and when it is determined that the external signal output time has not ended, the process proceeds to step S751.

In step S742, the timer value “46 (D)” is set as the external signal output time in FIG. With the above processing, when the external signal output time is “0”, “46 (D)” is set, and when it is not “0”, the setting is not performed.
In the next step S743, the following processing is executed.
(1) In FIG. 27, the address (F070 (H)) of the RWM 53 storing the number of medal bet signal outputs is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is “0”, it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output count. If it is determined in step S743 that there is a medal bet signal output count, the process proceeds to step S744. If it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output count, the process proceeds to step S746.

In the next step S744, “1” is subtracted from the value (medal bet signal output count) stored in the address (F070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S745, the D6 bit of the C register is set to “1”. The D6 bit corresponds to the D6 bit (medal bet signal) of the output port 4 in FIG.

In the next step S746, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address value indicated by the HL register value is set to “+1”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27, the HL register value changes from the address “F070 (H)” indicating the medal bet signal output count to the address “F071 (H)” indicating the medal payout signal output count.
(2) The value (number of medal payout signal outputs) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not “0”, it is determined that there is a medal payout signal output count. If it is determined in step S746 that there is a medal payout signal output count, the process proceeds to step S747. If it is determined that there is no medal payout signal output count, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S747, “1” is subtracted from the medal payout output count. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value stored at the address (F071 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S748, the D7 bit of the C register is set to “1”. The D7 bit corresponds to the D7 bit (medal payout signal) of the output port 4 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S749, ON / OFF inversion of the output bit is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value (medal signal data) stored at the address (F094 (H)) indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) XOR the A register value and the C register value and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value at the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value.

Here, in the C register value, when the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, the D7 bit is always “1”. When the medal bet signal output count is not “0”, the D6 bit is always “1”.
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F094 (H)) which is the A register value, the D7 bit is “1” when the medal payout signal is on, and the D7 bit is “0” when it is off. Similarly, in the medal signal data, the D6 bit is “1” when the medal bet signal is on, and the D6 bit is “0” when it is off.

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1” and the medal payout signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 10000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 00000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “0”.
When the medal payout signal is “0” and the medal payout signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “1”.

The same applies to the medal bet signal. For example, when the medal payout signal is “0”, the medal bet signal is “1”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal bet signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 11 million
After XOR operation: 10000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “1” and the medal bet signal is “0”.
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1”, the medal bet signal is “0”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal bet signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 100000000
C register value: 11 million
After XOR operation: 01000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “0” and the medal bet signal is “1”.

In step S750, output data of a medal bet signal and a medal payout signal are set. In this process, the value stored in the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
By this processing, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit of the A register is “1”, and when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register is “1”.

In step S751, the B register value and the A register value are ORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register. Here, the B register value is a value stored by the external signal output data management of FIG. 57, and D0 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 5) are defined.
The A register stores medal bet signals and medal payout signal data according to this flowchart. Therefore, by ORing the B register value and the A register value, the data of the external signals 1 to 5, the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal data are combined into the A register (1 byte). Further, the A register value is stored in the output port 4 in FIG. As a result, an external signal is transmitted from the output port 4. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT) in step S616 of FIG.
In step S761, clear data for conditional device information is set. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the condition device output time of the address “F024 (H)” in the A register in FIG. 31.
As described above, in FIG. 50, if it is determined in step S311 that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, in step S316, the value of “25 (D)” is set as the conditional device output time. Remembered. Then, this value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt (specifically, at the time of timer measurement in step S605 in FIG. 54). Accordingly, after the value “25 (D)” is stored, “0” is obtained after the “25” interruption.

  In the next step S762, it is determined whether or not the condition device information is being output. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0” (zero flag = “1”). If “0”, it is determined that the condition device information is not being output, and “0”. If not, it is determined that the condition device information is being output. If it is determined that the condition device information is being output, the process proceeds to step S763. If it is determined that the condition device information is not being output, the process proceeds to step S767.

  In step S763, the address of the RWM 53 of the accessory condition device information is set. Specifically, the address “F092 (H)” of the accessory condition device information in FIG. 29 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value = “F0 (H)” and the L register value = “92 (H)”. In the next step S764, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information. This process performs an operation of subtracting “12.5 (25/2)” from the value stored in the A register (the A register stores the condition device output time in step S761). If it is determined that the calculation result is greater than “0” (carry flag ≠ “1”), “Yes” is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not half of the time has elapsed from “24”, which is the initial value of the conditional device output time. When it is determined that it is time to output the accessory condition apparatus information, the process proceeds to step S766, and when it is determined that it is not time to output the accessory condition apparatus information, the process proceeds to step S765.

  In step S765, the RWM 53 address of the winning and replay condition device information is set. This process subtracts “1” from the HL register value in order to store the address of the winning and replay condition device information in FIG. 29, that is, “F091 (H)” in the HL register. As a result, HL register value = “F091 (H)” (H register value = “F0 (H)” and L register value = “91 (H)”).

Next, the process proceeds to step S766, where the condition device information is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data (the accessory condition device information or the winning and replay condition device information) stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = “F091 (H)”, the value of the winning and replay condition device information is stored, and when the HL register value = “F092 (H)”, the accessory condition device information is stored. The value is stored.
In step S767, the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 7 in FIG. As a result, the condition device information can be output (transmitted) from the output port 7 to the testing machine (although the output processing is executed in the slot machine 10 on the market, it is not actually output). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  In the conditional device information output process described above, if the timer value of the conditional device output time is “0” in step S762, “No” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S767. In this case, since the A register value is “0”, “0” (00000000 (B)) is output as the conditional device information.

When the value of the condition device output time is not “0” (“1” to “24”), the condition device information is output for each interrupt process.
As the initial value of the conditional device output time, “25 (D)” is set in step S316 of FIG. 50, but “1” is subtracted in step S605 during the interrupt processing of FIG. The process proceeds to the condition device information output process. Therefore, in FIG. 50, when “25” is set in step S316 and then the process proceeds to step S762 in FIG. 59 for the first time, the conditional device output time value is “24”.

  Further, in the case of outputting the condition device information, when the condition device output time is “13” to “24” (first period) in the determination in step S764, the condition to be output is not executed because step S765 is not executed. The device information becomes the accessory condition device information. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S764 that the condition device output time is “1” to “12” (second period), the process in step S765 is executed. And replay information device information.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an output example of condition device information in step S767 of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 60, the winning and replay condition device number “23” (small role C1) is won in the “N” game in the 1BBA, and the winning and replay condition device is played in the next “N + 1” game. An output example of the condition device information when the number “1” (Replay A) is won is shown. In the “N” game, 1 BBA is not won.
First, when it is inside 1 BBA, the D0 bit of the accessory condition device information is “1”. Therefore, the accessory condition device information is “10000001 (B)”.
In addition, when the condition device number “23” is won in the “N” game, the D0 to D5 bits of the winning and replay condition device information are “010111” (= “23 (D)”). And the replay condition device information is “010110111 (B)”.

  In the “N” game, while the condition device output time value is “24 (D)” to “13 (D)”, “Yes” is set in step S764 of FIG. 59, and the role set in step S763 is set. Output the condition equipment information. Next, while the condition device output time value is “12 (D)” to “1 (D)”, “No” is obtained in step S764 in FIG. 59, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S765 is displayed. Output. Next, when the condition device output time value becomes “0”, the condition device information (“00000000 (B)”) cleared in step S761 is output because “No” is obtained in step S762 in FIG.

  Next, when the winning combination is performed in the “N + 1” game and the winning and replay condition device number “1” is won, the condition device output time values are “24 (D)” to “13 (D)”. "10000001 (B)" is output while the condition device output time value is "12 (D)" to "1 (D)", as in the "N" game. (B) "is output. Thereby, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 60 is obtained.

Second Embodiment
FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an address arrangement of timer values according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 31 according to the first embodiment.
The second embodiment in FIG. 61 illustrates three types A to C.
In the second embodiment A, the address arrangement and the contents of each address are the same as those in the first embodiment (FIG. 31). However, the reference address is different from that of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the reference address is set to “F021 (H)”, but in the second embodiment A, the reference address is “F02C (H)”.

In the first embodiment, as shown in the timer measurement flowchart of FIG. 55, the reference address “F021 (H)” (first) is started and the timer value of “F02C (H)” is finally set to “1”. Subtracted.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment A, starting from the reference address “F02C (H)” (first), finally, the timer value “F021 (H)” is decremented by “1”.

In FIG. 61, in the second embodiment B, addresses are assigned in order from the 2-byte timer. Accordingly, the addresses “F028 (H)” to “F02D (H)” in the first embodiment are the addresses “F021 (H)” to “F026 (H)” in the second embodiment B.
For example, addresses “F021 (H)” and “F022 (H)” are addresses of medal payout device control time. Furthermore, this address becomes the reference address. The address of the 1-byte timer is arranged after the 2-byte timer, and is from “F027 (H)” to “F02D (H)”.
Further, in FIG. 61, in the second embodiment C, the arrangement and contents of the addresses are the same as those in the second embodiment B, but the second address is that the reference address is “F02D (H)”. Different from Embodiment B.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (example 1) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A in FIG.
First, in step S771, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F02E (H)” in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 61, the address range of the timer value is “F021 (H)” to “F02D (H)”. Therefore, “F02E (H)” is not the address range of the timer value. However, in step S771, a value obtained by adding “2” to “F02C (H)” which is the lower digit address of the reference address is stored in the HL register.
In step S772, the 2-byte timer number is set. Since the 2-byte timer number is “3” as in the first embodiment, “3” is stored in the B register.

In the next step S773, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register. In other words, “2” is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, “F02E (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F02C (H)” (address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register in step S773.
If “F02C (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S773, “F02A (H)” (game standby display start time address) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S773. Is memorized.
Furthermore, when “F02A (H)” is stored in the HL register before the processing in step S773, “F028 (H)” (medal payout device control time address) is stored in the HL register by the processing in step S773. Is memorized.

In the next step S774, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts "1" from the 2-byte value consisting of the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored at the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. Execute the process. This process is the same as step S637 in FIG. In the second embodiment, “2-byte timer value update” is all the same as this processing.
Next, proceeding to step S775, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process proceeds to step S776, and when it is determined that measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S773.

In step S776, the number of 1-byte timers is set. In this process, “7” corresponding to the number of timer values to be updated is stored in the B register.
In the next step S777, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S775 to step S776, the HL register value is “F028 (H)”. Therefore, by subtracting “1” from the HL register value, the HL register value becomes “F027 (H)” and the address of the monitoring time when the blocker is on is stored.

In step S778, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process is the same as step S633 in FIG. In the second embodiment, “1 byte timer value update” is all the same as this processing.
In the next step S779, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S777.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating timer measurement (example 2) based on the address arrangement and the reference address according to the second embodiment A.
First, in step S791, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F02C (H)” in the HL register.
Unlike the example 1 of the second embodiment A, this process stores the reference address (lower digit address) value of the 2-byte timer in the HL register.
In the next step S792, the number of 2-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing “3” in the B register.
In the next step S793, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from a 2-byte value consisting of a value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and a value stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing. In other words, “2” is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register.

In step S794, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register.
With this processing, “F02C (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F02A (H)” (game standby display start time address) is stored in the HL register in step S794. .
If “F02A (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S794, “F028 (H)” (medal payout device control time address) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S794. Is memorized.
Furthermore, when “F028 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S794, “F026 (H)” (blocker off monitoring time address) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S794. Is memorized.

In the next step S795, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process advances to step S796. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S793.
In step S796, address correction is executed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S795 to step S796, as described above, the HL register value is “F026 (H)”. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 61, the address at which the 1-byte timer value is first subtracted is the blocker-on monitoring time of the address “F027 (H)”. Therefore, “1” is added to the HL register value so that the address to be subtracted at the beginning of the 1-byte timer value is obtained.

In the next step S797, a 1-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “7” in the B register.
In step S798, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S799, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, the process proceeds to step S800, and it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S798.

  When Example 1 (FIG. 62) and Example 2 (FIG. 63) of the second embodiment A are compared, in Example 1 (FIG. 62), the process of step S796 (address correction) of Example 2 (FIG. 63) is performed. Since it is not necessary, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S771 as in Example 1 (FIG. 62) is preferable.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing timer measurement at the address arrangement and reference address of the second embodiment B in FIG.
First, in step S811, a measurement start timer address is set. This processing is processing for storing “F021 (H)” (medal payout device control time address), which is a reference address value, in the HL register.
In the next step S812, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “3” corresponding to the number of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In step S813, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from a 2-byte value consisting of data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing.

In step S814, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register and further adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. In other words, “2” is added to the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, “F021 (H)” is initially stored in the HL register, but “F023 (H)” (game standby display start time address) is stored in the HL register by the processing in step S814. Remembered.
If “F023 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S814, “F025 (H)” (address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S814. Is done.
Furthermore, when “F025 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S814, “F027 (H)” (external signal output time address) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S814. Is memorized.

In the next step S815, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process proceeds to step S816, and when it is determined that measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S813.

In step S816, the number of 1-byte timers is set. In this process, “7” corresponding to the number of timer values to be updated is stored in the B register.
In the next step S817, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S815 to step S816, the HL register value is “F027 (H)” (address of the external signal output time), and the tie value updated first in the 1-byte timer. Address.
In the next step S818, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S819, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S817.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the timer arrangement (example 1) at the address arrangement and the reference address in the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S831, a measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address stores “F02E (H)” in the HL register as in Example 1 of the second embodiment A. This address is an address obtained by adding “1” to the address of the monitoring time when the blocker is on to store the last timer of the 1-byte timer.

  In step S832, the 1-byte timer number is set. Here, “7” is set in the B register.

In the next step S833, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. By this process, for example, when “F02E (H)” is stored in the HL register, “F02D (H)” (address of the monitoring time when the blocker is on) is stored in the HL register.
If “F02D (H)” is stored in the HL register before the processing in step S833, “F02C (H)” (blocker off monitoring time address) is stored in the HL register by the processing in step S833. Remembered.

Furthermore, when “F028 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S833, “F027 (H)” (external signal output time address) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S833. Is memorized.
Next, proceeding to step S834, the 1-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S835, it is determined whether the 1-byte timer measurement has ended. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. When the B register value after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S836. If it is determined that the 1-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S833.

In step S836, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing the number of 3-byte timers “3” in the B register.
In the next step S837, the next timer address is set. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value, and further, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. In other words, “2” is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register.
Accordingly, since the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S837 is “F027 (H)”, the HL register value becomes “F025 (H)” by the process of step S837.
In step S838, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from a 2-byte value with the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value as the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” as the upper digit.

  In the next step S839, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement is finished. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register, and when the B register value after the subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement is not finished. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S837. When it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the address arrangement and timer measurement (example 2) at the reference address in the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S851, a measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing “F02D (H)”, which is the reference address, in the HL register.
In step S852, the 1-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “7”, which is the number of 1-byte timers, in the B register.

In the next step S853, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In step S854, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. With this processing, when “F02D (H)” is stored in the HL register, “F02C (H)” (blocker-off monitoring time address) is stored in the HL register.
If “F027 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S854, “F026 (H)” (the upper address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S854. Remembered.

Next, proceeding to step S855, it is determined whether measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is finished, the process proceeds to step S856, and when it is determined that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S853.

In step S856, address correction is performed. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S855 to step S856, the HL register value is "F026 (H)". This address value is not “F025 (H)”, which is the first address (lower digit) at which subtraction of the 1-byte timer value starts. Therefore, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value, and the HL register value is corrected to be the first address (lower digit) at which subtraction of the 1-byte timer value is started.
In step S857, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing “3”, which is the number of 2-byte timers, in the B register.
In the next step S858, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value and further subtracting “1” from the HL register value.

In step S859, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts “1” from the 2-byte value consisting of the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is processing to do.
Next, proceeding to step S860, it is determined whether measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished.
When it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer is finished, the processing according to this flowchart is finished, and when it is judged that the measurement is not finished, the process returns to step S858.

  When Example 1 (FIG. 65) and Example 2 (FIG. 66) of the second embodiment C are compared, in Example 1 (FIG. 65), the process of step S856 (address correction) in Example 2 (FIG. 66) is performed. Since it is not necessary, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly. In other words, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, the method of storing (setting) an address other than the original timer value address in step S831 as in Example 1 (FIG. 65) is preferable.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The type of timer of the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 31, and the game machine is provided with other various timers. The timer shown in FIG. 31 is an example and is not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 43, when proceeding to the care medal check in step S182, the following control is performed.
When the rising signal of the closing sensor 1 is detected, a timer value called closing check 1 passing check time is set, and “1” is subtracted every interruption processing. If the insertion sensor 1 continues to detect medals even when the timer value of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time becomes “0”, a medal retention error (CE error) is assumed.
Similarly, when a rising signal of the making sensor 2 is detected, a timer value called making sensor 2 passage check time is set, and “1” is subtracted every interruption processing. When the insertion sensor 2 continues to detect medals even when the timer value of the insertion sensor 2 passage check time becomes “0”, a medal retention error (CE error) is set.

In the example of FIG. 31, the number of 1-byte timers is 7 and the number of 2-byte timers is 3. However, the rule described in FIG. The address may be arranged according to
Here, when the number of 1-byte timers is “N1” and the number of 2-byte timers is “N2”, any of “N1> N2”, “N1 = N2”, and “N1 <N2” may be used. .
Further, when “N1 ≧ 2”, “N2 = 0” may be used. Similarly, when “N2 ≧ 2”, “N1 = 0” may be used.
Furthermore, “N1 ≧ 1 and N2 ≧ 1” may be satisfied.

(2) In this embodiment, “1” is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value can be updated at another predetermined cycle. Alternatively, “1” may be subtracted from the timer value by a plurality of interruptions. For example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every five interrupts. Furthermore, the subtraction value of the timer value is not limited to “1”. Further, for example, the timer measurement process may be executed once every 5 interrupts, and the timer value may be subtracted by “2”.
(3) In this embodiment, when the timer value before update is “0”, the timer value is also set to “0” after update. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the timer value is “0” before the update. If it is determined that the timer value before the update is “0”, the timer value is updated from the update processing target. It can also be a program to be excluded. However, as in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the timer value before the update is “0” (without determining whether or not it is “0”), the program can be updated if it is updated uniformly. It can be simplified (reduced program capacity).
(4) Each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is an example, and is not limited to the value shown in FIG. For example, the 1-byte timer value shown in FIG. 31 may be a 2-byte timer value depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10, and the 2-byte timer value shown in FIG. It may be a timer value.

  (5) In the present embodiment, an example of a 1-byte timer and a 2-byte timer has been described, but a 3-byte timer may be provided. When the initial value of the 2-byte timer is set to “FFFF (H)” and “1” is subtracted by “2.235 ms” every interrupt process, it is possible to count about 146 seconds. Therefore, for example, when counting 3 minutes, a 3-byte timer is required. When a 3-byte timer is provided, a process of adding “3” to the HL register value may be executed when setting the next address of the 3-byte timer.

(6) In this embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to “2.235 ms”, but is not limited to this value, and various settings such as 1 ms and 3.5 ms can be made.
Further, the timing for setting the various timer values shown in FIG. 31 is not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiment, and any timing may be used as long as it is appropriate.
(7) The addresses of the RWM 53 and the contents corresponding to the addresses shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 are examples, and can be set as appropriate.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 8, and solve the problems to be solved by the original inventions and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. Means for achieving this and the effects of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not meant to be limited to the original inventions 1 to 8.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 1 In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when there are a plurality of measurement objects (when a plurality of timer values are updated), there is a possibility that the program becomes complicated and the program capacity increases. is there.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to update each count value with a simple program when there are a plurality of count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
(B1) The first solving means corresponding to the first embodiment (FIG. 55) is:
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (in FIG. 31, seven areas “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)”) )When,
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S631), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S632) memorize | stored in is performed,
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S633);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S634);
c) By repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S635) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”), the count value of the storage area can be updated. It is characterized by that.

(B2) The first solving means corresponding to the second embodiment C (example 2) (FIG. 66) is:
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed (in the second embodiment C of FIG. 61, “F027 (H)” to “F02D ( H) ”7), and
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 66) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02D (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S851), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S852) memorize | stored in is performed,
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S853);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S854);
c) By repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S855) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value (“0”), the count value of the storage area can be updated. It is characterized by that.

(B3) The second solving means (second embodiment C (example 1) shown in FIG. 65)
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed (in the second embodiment B of FIG. 61, “F027 (H)” to “F02D ( H) ”7), and
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 65) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S831), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S832) memorize | stored in is performed,
a) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S833);
b) A process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S834);
c) It is possible to update the count value of the storage area by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S835) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. .

(B4) Third solution means corresponding to the second embodiment A (example 2) (FIG. 63)
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61, “F028 (H)” to “F02D ( H) ”) and
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 63) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02C (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S791), and a predetermined value ("3" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S792) stored in
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S793);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S794);
c) It is possible to update the count value of the storage area by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S795) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. .

(B5) The third solving means corresponding to the second embodiment B (FIG. 64) is:
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed ("F021 (H)" to "F026 (in the second embodiment B of FIG. 61). H) ”) and
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 64) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S811), and a predetermined value ("3" which is the number of timers) is stored in the second register (B register) The process (step S812) stored in the
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S813);
b) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S814);
c) It is possible to update the count value of the storage area by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S815) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. .

(B6) Fourth solution means (second embodiment A (example 1) shown in FIG. 62)
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61, “F028 (H)” to “F02D ( H) ”) and
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The count value updating means includes
Processing for storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (step S771), and processing for storing a predetermined value ("3" which is the number of timers) in the second register (B register) (Step S772) and
a) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S773);
b) A process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S774);
c) It is possible to update the count value of the storage area by repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register (step S775) until the value of the second register reaches a specific value. .
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, it is possible to continue to update a plurality of types of storage areas simply by executing the update process of the first register and the second register and the subtraction process of the count value. It becomes.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 1 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), a first count value for determining whether or not the first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S326 in FIG. 51), a count value for determining whether or not the second time (reel stop reception waiting time) has elapsed is stored. A second storage area (F022 (H)),
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), update processing (step S633 in FIG. 55) that updates at least the count values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is performed. Run,
In the update process,
When the count value before update is “N (N ≧ 1)”, the count value is updated to “N−1” by subtraction,
When the count value before update is “0”, the count value remains “0”.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, the process of uniformly updating the count value can be executed without performing the process of determining whether or not the count value before the update is “0”. The program for updating the count value can be simplified.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 3 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), a first count value for determining whether or not the first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S326 in FIG. 51), a count value for determining whether or not the second time (reel stop reception waiting time) has elapsed is stored. A second storage area (F022 (H)),
An address of the first storage area and an address of the second storage area are sequentially arranged,
When it is time to update the count value,
a) A value (F021 (H)) for specifying the address value of the first storage area is stored in the register (HL register) (step S631 in FIG. 55),
b) “1” is subtracted from the count value of the first storage area based on the value of the register (step S633),
c) Addition or subtraction of a predetermined value to the register value (addition in the first embodiment; however, subtraction in the second embodiment C, for example) specifies the address of the second storage area by the register value. To a value to be updated (step S634),
d) "1" is subtracted from the count value of the second storage area based on the value of the register (step S633).
Thus, the count values of the first storage area and the second storage area can be updated every time the count value is updated (step S605 in FIG. 54).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, it is possible to continue to update a plurality of types of storage areas simply by executing a register update process and a count value subtraction process.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (first embodiment; FIGS. 31 and 55)
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) for storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed;
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The storage area is
M (M ≧ 1) (7) storage areas X (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) capable of storing a count value of 1 byte;
N (N ≧ 1) (3) storage areas Y (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) that are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store a count value of 2 bytes; Have
The count value updating means includes
A value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) is stored in a register (HL register) (step S631),
A 1-byte timer subtraction process (step S633) including at least a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area X based on the value of the register (step S633) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S634). To S635),
After completing the 1-byte timer subtraction process, a 2-byte timer subtraction process (steps S637 to S639) including at least a process (step S637) of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area Y based on the value of the register. Is executed.

The second solving means (for example, the second embodiment A, FIG. 61, FIG. 62)
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) for storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed;
Count value updating means (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms),
The storage area is
M (M ≧ 1) (3) storage areas X (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) capable of storing a count value consisting of 2 bytes;
N (N ≧ 1) (7) storage areas Y (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) that are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store a count value of 1 byte; Have
The count value updating means includes
A value specifying a predetermined address is stored in a register (step S771),
A 2-byte timer subtraction process (step S773) including at least a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area X based on the value of the register (step S774) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S773). To S775)
After completing the 2-byte timer subtraction process, a 1-byte timer subtraction process (steps S777 to S779) including at least a process (step S778) of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area Y based on the value of the register. Is executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, the count values of a plurality of storage areas each having a 1-byte storage area and a 2-byte storage area can be updated by a simple method.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be solved by the invention 5 at the beginning In the conventional gaming machine, when determining whether or not the count value consisting of 2 bytes (the upper 1 byte, the lower 1 byte) is “0”, the upper byte Therefore, there is a problem that it is necessary to determine the values of both the lower byte and the lower byte, and accordingly, a program process is required.
The problem to be solved by the invention is that, when updating the count value of the 2-byte storage area, whether the original count value of the 2-byte storage area is “0” or not It is possible to execute without determining both values.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S255 in FIG. 46), a 2-byte count value (0B7D (0B7D ( H)) for storing 2-byte storage areas (F028 (H) and F029 (H))
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), “1” is subtracted from the count value in the storage area (step S637 in FIG. 55),
Of the two-byte count value, when the value of the upper byte is “0”, it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.
The second solving means is the first solving means,
Assuming that the predetermined time has elapsed when the initial value “x (H)” (0A7E (H)) is “0” as the count value, the value of the upper byte is set to “0”. The initial value “x + y (H)” (y = FF (H), x + y = 0B7D (H)) that is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed when the predetermined condition is satisfied is stored when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is memorized in the area.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, when it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value of the upper byte is “0” (lower order). Since it is not necessary to read and judge the byte value), the program capacity can be reduced and the processing speed can be increased.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 6 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
On the condition that a predetermined time (minimum game time; 1837 interrupt) has passed since a predetermined time (step S312 in FIG. 50), the game can proceed (in FIG. 50, the process can proceed to step S312 and subsequent steps).
A 2-byte storage area (F02C (H) and F02D (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed;
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), “1” is subtracted from the count value in the storage area (step S637 in FIG. 55).
Of the two-byte count value, it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed on the condition that the value of the upper byte is “0” (“Yes” in step S311 in FIG. 50), and the game can proceed. It is characterized by.
In the embodiment, “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “072C (H)” corresponding to the minimum game time (1837 interrupt) is stored in a 2-byte storage area (F02C ( H) and F02D (H)).
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 Same as Initial Invention 5.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 7 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
A game medium payout device (medal payout device) having a drive unit (hopper motor 36) for paying out game media (medals);
When the operation of the drive unit is started (step S256 in FIG. 46), the drive unit is operated until a predetermined time (medal payout device control time; 2687 interrupt) elapses.
A 2-byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed;
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), “1” is subtracted from the count value in the storage area (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the value of the upper byte of the 2-byte count value becomes “0”, it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (“Yes” in step S257), and the operation of the drive unit is stopped (step S25). S260)
It is characterized by that.
In the embodiment, “0B7D (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “0A7E (H)” corresponding to the medal payout device control time (2687 interrupt) is stored in a 2-byte storage area ( F028 (H) and F029 (H)).
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 Same as Initial Invention 5.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
A payout number display section (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying the number of game media paid out is provided.
After displaying the number of game media on the payout number display section, a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time (game standby display start time; 26847 interrupt) has elapsed under a certain condition is stored 2 Byte storage area (F02A (H) and F02B (H))
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), “1” is subtracted from the count value in the storage area (step S637 in FIG. 55).
When the upper byte value of the 2-byte count value becomes “0”, it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (“Yes” in step S161 in FIG. 42), and the display of the payout number display unit The mode can be switched to a predetermined mode (“00”, “* 0”, or “**” (where “*” indicates light extinction)).
In the embodiment, “69DD (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “68DE (H)” corresponding to the game standby display start time (26847 interruption) is stored in a 2-byte storage area ( F02A (H) and F02B (H)).
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 Same as Initial Invention 5.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting switch 14 Reset switch 15 Door switch 17 Display window 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Cross key 25 Menu button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 (37a, 37b) Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44 (44a, 44b) Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Set-up switch 50 Main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 68 RT control means 69 Advantageous section control means 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command Transmission means 73 Set value display LED (digit 5)
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED (digit 1, 2)
78 Acquisition number display LED (digit 3, 4)
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet indicator LED
79b 2-bet indicator LED
79c 3-bet indicator LED
79d Game start indicator LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
79g Production display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 input ports (input ports 0 to 2)
82 output ports (output ports 0-7)
83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (4)

A first 1-byte storage area and a second 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
In a predetermined cycle, at least, with the count value and the second updatable count value updating means the count of 1-byte storage area of the first 1-byte storage area,
The count value updating means includes
A process of storing a value specifying a predetermined address in the first register and a process of storing the predetermined value in the second register;
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 1-byte storage area based on the value of the first register;
b) a process of updating the value of the first register;
c) The process of updating the value of the second register is repeatedly executed until the value of the second register reaches a specific value, so that at least the count value of the first 1-byte storage area and the second 1-byte memory are stored. The count value of the area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above a), when the count value stored in the 1-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Therefore, the count value after subtraction remains “0” . A first 1-byte storage area and a second 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
In a predetermined cycle, at least, with the count value and the second updatable count value updating means the count of 1-byte storage area of the first 1-byte storage area,
The count value updating means includes
A process of storing a value specifying a predetermined address in the first register and a process of storing the predetermined value in the second register;
a) processing to update the value of the first register;
b) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 1-byte storage area based on the value of the first register;
c) The process of updating the value of the second register is repeatedly executed until the value of the second register reaches a specific value, so that at least the count value of the first 1-byte storage area and the second 1-byte memory are stored. The count value of the area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above b), when the count value stored in the 1-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Therefore, the count value after subtraction remains “0” . A first 2-byte storage area and a second 2-byte storage area for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
In a predetermined cycle, at least, with the count value and the second updatable count value updating means, the count value of the 2-byte storage area of the first 2-byte storage areas,
The count value updating means includes
A process of storing a value specifying a predetermined address in the first register and a process of storing the predetermined value in the second register;
a) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 2-byte storage area based on the value of the first register;
b) a process of updating the value of the first register;
c) By repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register until the value of the second register reaches a specific value, at least the count value of the first 2-byte storage area and the second 2-byte storage The count value of the area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above a), when the count value stored in the 2-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Therefore, the count value after subtraction remains “0” . A first 2-byte storage area and a second 2-byte storage area for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed;
In a predetermined cycle, at least, with the count value and the second updatable count value updating means, the count value of the 2-byte storage area of the first 2-byte storage areas,
The count value updating means includes
A process of storing a value specifying a predetermined address in the first register and a process of storing the predetermined value in the second register;
a) processing to update the value of the first register;
b) a process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the 2-byte storage area based on the value of the first register;
c) By repeatedly executing the process of updating the value of the second register until the value of the second register reaches a specific value, at least the count value of the first 2-byte storage area and the second 2-byte storage The count value of the area can be updated ,
In the process of subtracting “1” from the count value in the above b), when the count value stored in the 2-byte storage area is “0”, the value obtained by subtracting “1” becomes “0”. Therefore, the count value after subtraction remains “0” .

Images